Electra Elite IPK II Features and Specifications Manual

Notice
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a
.pdf file, some minor font and format changes may occur. When
viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your
specific PC or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics.
Therefore, when you view the document, fonts may be substituted and
your individual printer may not have the capability to print the
document correctly.

FEATURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL
INT-1072 (IPK II)
DOCUMENT REVISION 1
(RELEASE 1000)

NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at
any time without notice.
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The
information contained herein is the property of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. and shall not be reproduced
without prior written approval of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite is a registered trademark of NEC
America, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. AT&T is a registered
trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph Company. Lucent Technologies is a trademark or
service mark of Lucent Technologies Inc. Nortel Networks and the Nortel Networks logo are
trademarks of Nortel Networks. Verizon Wireless is a trademark of Verizon Trademark Services, LLC.
Copyright 2006
NEC Infrontia, Inc.
6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Technology Development

Preface
Before Reading this Manual
This manual provides detailed information for each of the system's features. If you are not familiar with
the features, the Table of Contents provides a list of the features and where to find the feature within
the manual.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Congratulations! You have purchased the NEC Electra Elite IPK II System.
The Electra Elite IPK II system is a feature-rich key system that provides many features including
Automatic Call Distribution, Computer Telephony Integration, IP Station and IP Trunk support, ISDN
compatibility, PBX compatibility, TAPI compatibility, Voice over Internet Protocol and Uniform Call
Distribution.
The Electra Elite IPK II system provides the customer needs today, and as business expands the
system can be expanded to grow as well.
The Electra Elite IPK II system has a set of manuals that provide all the information necessary to
install and support the system. This preface describes these manuals.
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
Electra Elite IPK II General Description Manual
This Manual provides general information about the system, its features, system configuration and
standards. This manual provides an overview of the Electra Elite IPK II system and can be used to
present information to potential customers.
Electra Elite IPK II System Hardware Manual
The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer. This manual has detailed
instructions for installing the Electra Elite IPK II KSU, ETUs, Multiline Terminals, and optional
equipment.
Features and Specifications
i

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual
This manual provides instructions for programming the Electra Elite IPK II system using a Multiline
Terminal or PC.
ii

___
Do __
cu __
me __
nt __
Re___
visi __
on __
1 ____________________________________________________
E ___
lect __
ra __
Elit __
e I __
PK__
II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
viii
Table of Contents

Introduction
1
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Electra Elite IPK II (DTH telephones), Dterm Series i (DTR telephones),
I
Dterm IPK (ITH Telephones), Electra Elite (DTU telephones), and Dterm
nt
Series E (DTP telephones) can be used with the Electra Elite IPK II
r
system.
oduc
SECTION 2
MULTILINE TERMINALS USED WITH THE SYSTEM
tion
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
The Electra Elite IPK II Terminals (DTH telephones) either with or without
LCD display offer a variety of colors, and line sizes.
Terminals are available in black or white.
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the display terminals
provides call status data and programming information.
Terminal line sizes include 8-line, 16-line, and 32-line.
IP terminals are available in 4-line, 8-line and 16-line (with LCD).
Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is
standard.
All are compatible with the AD(A)-R, AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, CT(A)-R
Unit, CT(U)-R, or HF-R Unit adapter. The AP(R)-R Unit requires an
AC-R Unit to supply AC power.
The ADA-2R is compatible with ITH-2 IP terminals.
The ADA-2R and PS(A)-R are compatible with ITH-3 IP terminals.
An Attendant Add-On DCR-60-1 CONSOLE is available with 60
station and/or outside line assignments and 12 function keys.
Features and Specifications
1 - 1

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Electra Elite IPK II Terminal Feature Access, Single On/Off, or One-Touch Keys
Keys are designated Feature Access, Single On/Off, or One-Touch throughout this
manual. The keys operate much the same, but various limitations imposed on each
type are described below.
Feature Access Keys
Depending on the type, a Multiline Terminal can have 2, 8, 16, or 24 line keys.
These highly-flexible keys can be used for station DSS/BLF and Speed Dial.
Single On/Off Keys
Line keys may also be assigned as Single On/Off keys in System Programming
to toggle a feature on/off. This assignment has no impact on the Feature Access
keys, but the assigned features are very specific. Call Forward All Call, Call
Forward Busy/No Answer, Scrolling (CID), headset, and DND are examples of
features available for Single On/Off keys.
One-Touch Keys
One-Touch keys can perform the same function as Feature Access keys. A
Multiline Terminal has a fixed number of these keys. No system assignment is
necessary, and the number of keys ranges from none to 16 depending on the
terminal type.
Line/Feature
Access Keys
One-Touch Keys
Key Assignment Example
1 - 2
Introduction

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Dterm Series i Terminals
The Dterm Series i Terminals (DTR telephones) with or without LCD display offer a
variety of colors and line sizes.
Terminals are available in black or white.
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on display terminals provides call status
data and programming information.
Line sizes include 8-line, 16-line, and 32-line.
2-line on the DTR-2DT-1.
Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard
(except on the DTR-2DT-1).
All but the DTR-2DT-1, DTR-1-1, DTR-1HM-1 and Cordless terminals are
compatible with the AD(A)-R, AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R , CT(A)-R and HF-R Unit
adapters. The AP(R)-R Unit requires an AC(A)-R Unit to supply AC power. For
Attendant Positions, an Attendant Add-On DCR-60-1 CONSOLE is available
with 60 station and/or outside line assignments and 12 function keys. The DTR-
2DT-1 has an internal Analog Port without ringer.
A two-line terminal with two Flexible Line keys (each with 2-color LED), nine
function keys, built-in speakerphone, a large LED to indicate incoming calls or
messages, and an outgoing only Analog SLT Port [AD(A)-R] is also available.
The Electra Elite IPK II Single Line Terminals are offered in two variations (DTR-
1-1 and DTR-1HM-1). Both terminals come in black or white. Both have DTMF
and Pulse Dialing compatibility, and offer Flash and Redial key functionality.
The Electra Elite IPK II Single Line Terminals come standard with a Message
Waiting Indicator that also functions as an Incoming Call Indication. During a
call, the receive audio level can be increased three levels and decreased two
levels from the default setting (six volume level settings in all). The terminals
offer four ring volume settings (Off, Soft, Medium, and Loud), and three ring
patterns (Slow, Medium, and Fast). The DTR Single Line Terminals also have a
Data Port that functions similar to that of an AP(R)-R optional adapter, and have
a built-in wall mount adapter. The DTR-1HM-1 terminal has eight
programmable speed dial buttons (maximum 21 digits each). The DTR-1HM-1
also has Hold and Monitor Function keys.
Dterm IPK ITH Terminals
The Dterm IPK ITH Terminals come with LCD display and offer a variety of colors and
line sizes:
Terminals are available in black or white.
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on display terminals provides call status
data and programming information.
Introduction
1 - 3

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Line sizes include 8-line and 16-line.
Speakerphone with full-duplex handsfree operation and headset jack is
standard.
Terminals are compatible with AD(A)-2R and PS(A)-R.
Electra Elite and Dterm Series E Terminals
The Electra Elite Terminals (DTU telephones) and Dterm Series E terminals (DTP
telephones) with or without LCD displays are available in a variety of colors and lines
sizes.
Terminals are available in black or white.
The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the display terminals provides call
status data and programming information.
Line sizes include 8-line, 16-line, and 32-line.
Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard.
The Dterm Handset Cordless terminal is a 16-button telephone (display only).
An Attendant Add-On DCU-60-1 CONSOLE is available for 60 station and/or
outside line assignments and 12 function keys.
A single line telephone Adapter can be used in place of a digital terminal for
connecting Single Line Telephones, or similar devices.
1 - 4
Introduction

Features
2
SECTION 1
ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
This chapter provides an alphabetical listing of the features that are
F
available with the Electra Elite IPK II system.
eat
Each feature provides the following information:
ure
Description briefly describes the feature and how it is use.
s
Conditions provides special operating conditions (if any) that need to be
considered with using the feature.
Default Settings indicates the factory default setting (if any)
System Availability describes multiline terminals that can be used with
this feature and lists any additional equipment, such as adapters or ETUs,
that must be installed for this feature to operate.
Programming lists the memory blocks that support the feature.
Related Features lists features that are associated with the feature
being described (e.g., the Account Codes feature lists the Abbreviated
Dialing feature in the related features list because abbreviated dialing bins
can contain stored account code (if any).
Operation provides step-by-step instructions for using the feature.
Features and Specifications
2 - 1

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
SECTION 2
IMPORTANT NOTES
Simplifying Multiline Terminal Operation with One-Touch Keys...
A multiline terminal user can access many features through Service Codes (e.g.,
Service Code 629 leaves a Message Waiting for a co-worker). To streamline the
operation of their telephone, a multiline terminal user can store these codes under
One-Touch Keys. This provides one-button operation for almost any feature. To find
out more, turn to the One-Touch Calling and One-Touch Serial Operation features.
Programmable Keys
When reading an instruction using programmable keys, you will see a notation similar
to (PGM 15-07 or SC nnn). This means that the key requires function code nnn, and
you can program this code through Program 15-07 or by dialing Service Code 751 or
752. Refer to the Programmable Function Keys feature for more information.
Using Handsfree
The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree. This lets a user just
press a line key or Speaker key to answer or place a call. For extensions without
Automatic Handsfree, the user must:
Lift the handset or press Speaker for Intercom dial tone.
Lift the handset or press Speaker, then press a line key for trunk dial tone.
Port Assignments
Port Calculation for Trunks:
The system detects the type of ETU (trunk or extension) and assigns the required
extension or trunk ports to the slot. The system will use the next available port
numbers - it will not reserve any ports.
2 - 2
Features

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
SECTION 3
IPK TO IPK II FEATURE COMPARISON LIST
The following table provides a cross-reference between the Electra Elite IPK and the
Electra Elite IPK II features.
IPK Feature Name
IPK II Feature Name
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
Account Code Entry
Account Code Entry
Add-On Conference
Conference
All Call Page
Paging, Internal
Alphanumeric Display
Alphanumeric Display
Analog Line Extender (Dterm Analog EXT)
Not Supported
Ancillary Device Connection
Ancillary Device Connection
Answer Hold
Answer Hold
Answer Key
Answer Key
Assigned Night Answer (ANA)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Attendant Add-On Console
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Attendant Camp-On
Call Waiting / Camp On
Attendant Positions
Attendant Call Queuing
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Attendant Transfer
Transfer
Authorization Code
Code Restriction Override
Automated Attendant
Voice Response System (VRS)
Automatic Answer with Delay Message
Voice Response System (VRS)
Automatic Call Distribution
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Callback
Callback
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching
Night Service
Automatic Hold
Hold
Automatic Number Indication (ANI) on T1
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Automatic Redial
Repeat Redial
Automatic Release
Automatic Release
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Automatic Route Selection
Features
2 - 3

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
IPK Feature Name
IPK II Feature Name
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Background Music Multiline Speaker
Background Music
Background Music Over External Speakers
Background Music
Barge-In
Barge In
Battery Backup System Memory
Battery Backup System Memory
Battery Backup System Power
Battery Backup System Power
Busy Lamp Field on Multiline Terminals
One-Touch Calling
Call Alert Notification
Off Hook Signaling
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Forward All Call
Call Forwarding
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
Call Forwarding
Call Forward Centrex
Not Supported
Call Forward Display
Call Forwarding
Call Forward Off-Premise
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forward Split
Call Forwarding
Call Monitoring
Call Monitoring
Call Park System
Park
Call Pickup Group
Group Call Pickup
Call Pickup Direct
Directed Call Pickup
Callback Request
Message Waiting
Caller ID Call Return
Caller ID Call Return
Caller ID Indication (Analog Trunks)
Caller ID
Cascade CPU
Not Supported
Centralized Voice Mail (with E&M Tie Lines)
Not Supported
Class of Service
Class of Service
Clock/Calendar Display
Clock/Calendar Display
CO Message Waiting Indication
CO Message Waiting Indication
CO/PBX, Tie Line Digit Restriction
Code Restriction
Code Restriction
Code Restriction
2 - 4
Features

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
IPK Feature Name
IPK II Feature Name
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
TAPI Compatibility
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications
Consecutive Speed Dial
Speed Dial System/Group/Station
Cordless Telephone Connection
Cordless Telephone Connection
Customized Message
Selectable Display Messaging
Data Line Security
Data Line Security
Delay Announcement
Voice Response System (VRS)
Delayed Ringing
Delayed Ringing
Dial 0 For Attendant
Operator
Dialed Number Indication Service (DNIS)
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Digit Insertion
Automatic Route Selection
Digital Line Extender (Dterm ISDN EXTender Plus)
Not Supported
Digital Voice Mail
Digital Voice Mail
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Paging Access
Paging, Internal
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
One-Touch Calling
Distinctive Ringing
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Do Not Disturb
Door Lock Release Relays
Door Box
Door/Monitor Telephone
Door Box
DP to DTMF Switching
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Drop Key
Drop Key
Dterm Analog Cordless Terminal
Not Supported
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
Dterm Handset Cordless
Dterm Handset Cordless
Dterm IP Gateway System
Dterm IP Gateway System
Features
2 - 5

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
IPK Feature Name
IPK II Feature Name
E&M Tie Lines (4-Wire)
Multiple Trunk Types
Elapsed Call Time
Call Duration Timer
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
Electra Professional Terminal Migration
Not Supported
Electronic Volume Control
Volume Controls
Elite ACD Plus
Not Supported
Elite CallAnalyst
Elite CallAnalyst
Elite Q-Master
Not Supported
EliteApps - Interactive Voice Response
EliteApps - Interactive Voice Response
EliteApps - PC Attendant
IPK II - PC Attendant
Emergency 911 Cut Through
E911 Compatibility
Enhanced 911
E911 Compatibility
Equal Access Accommodation
Code Restriction
External Tone Ringer
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
External Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
Paging, External
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Feature Access User Programmable
Programmable Function Keys
Flexible Line Assignment
Programmable Function Keys
Flexible Numbering Plan
Flexible System Numbering
Flexible Ringing Assignment
Ring Groups
Flexible Timeouts
Flexible Timeouts
Full Duplex Handsfree
Handsfree and Monitor
Full Handsfree Operation
Handsfree and Monitor
General Purpose Relays
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Ground Start Trunks
Multiple Trunk Types
Group Listening
Group Listen
Handset Mute
Handset Mute
Handsfree Answerback
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring
Handsfree and Monitor
2 - 6
Features

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
IPK Feature Name
IPK II Feature Name
Headset Connection (Built-In)
Headset Operation
Hold With Recall (Exclusive and Non-Exclusive)
Hold
Hot Key Pad
Not Supported
Hot Line
Hotline
Howler Tone Service
Howler Tone Service
I-Hold Indication
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Incoming Call Identification
Caller ID
Incoming Trunk Name or Number Display
Name Storing
Internal Hub
Internal Hub
Internal Voice/Tone Signaling
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Internal Zone Paging (Meet-Me)
Paging, Internal
IP CPU & Media Gateway
Not Supported
IP Station (MEGACO)
IP Station (MEGACO) - IAD Integrated Access Device
ISDN-BRI Trunk Connections
ISDN Compatibility
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections
ISDN Compatibility
I-Use Indication
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Key Function/Multifunction Registration
Multiple Trunk Types
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)
K-CCIS - T1
Large LED Indication
Message Waiting
Last Number Redial
Last Number Redial
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Automatic Route Selection
Live Monitoring
Digital Voice Mail
Loop Start Trunks
Multiple Trunk Types
Message Display Board
Not Supported
Message Waiting
Message Waiting
Microphone Control
Microphone Cutoff
Multiline Conference Bridge
Multiline Conference Bridge
Multilingual LCD Indication
Alphanumeric Display
Multimedia Conference Bridge
Multimedia Conference Bridge
Multiple Trunk Groups
Trunk Groups
Features
2 - 7

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
IPK Feature Name
IPK II Feature Name
Music on Hold
Music on Hold
NEC Elite PC Assistant
IPK II - PC Assistant
Nesting Dial
Not Supported
Night Call Pickup
Night Service
Night Chime
Night Service
Night Transfer
Night Service
Off-Hook Ringing
Off Hook Signaling
Off-Premise Extension
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension (Actual name)
One-Touch Feature Access
Programmable Function Keys
PC Programming
PC Programming
Pooled Line (Outgoing)
Trunk Group Routing
Power Failure Transfer
Power Failure Transfer
Preset Dialing
Dialing Number Preview
Prime Line Assignment
Prime Line Selection
Privacy on All Calls
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Privacy Release
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Private Lines
Private Line
Programming from Multiline Terminal
Programming from Multiline Terminal
Pushbutton Dial DTMF or DP
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
Recall Key
Flash
Recall With Station Identification
Transfer
Redial Key
Redial Key
Remote Programming
PC Programming
Resident System Program
Resident System Program
Restriction (Outgoing)
Code Restriction
Ring Tone Variation
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Ringing Line Preference
Line Preference
Route Advance Block
Trunk Group Routing
Save and Repeat
Save Number Dialed
2 - 8
Features

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
IPK Feature Name
IPK II Feature Name
Scrolling Directories
Directory Dialing
Secondary Incoming Extension
Secondary Incoming Extension
Seized Trunk Name/Number Display
Name Storing
Simplified Call Distribution
Department Calling
Single Line Telephone Access
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
SLT Adapter
SLT Adapter
SLT Timed Alarm
Alarm
Softkeys
Softkeys
Speed Dial Station
Speed Dial System/Group/Station
Speed Dial System
Speed Dial System/Group/Station
Speed Dial Stored Characters
Speed Dial System/Group/Station
Station Add-On Console
Station Add-On Console
Station Camp-On
Call Waiting / Camp On
Station Hunt
Station Hunt
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Station Message Detail Recording
Station Name Assignment User Programable
Station Name Assignment User Programmable
Station Outgoing Lockout
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Station Relocation
Station Relocation
Station Transfer
Transfer
Step Call
Department Step Calling
Store and Repeat
Memo Dial
Stored Hookflash
Speed Dial System/Group/Station
Synchronous Ringing
Synchronous Ringing
System Data Up/Down Load
PC Programming
T1 Connection
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Tandem Switching of 4-Wire E&M Tie Lines
Multiple Trunk Types
Tenant Service
Night Service
Three-Minute Reminder
Warning Tone For Long Conversation
Tone Override
Tone Override
Trunk Queuing
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
Features
2 - 9

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
IPK Feature Name
IPK II Feature Name
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Two-Color LEDs
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Unified Messaging
Unified Messaging
Unified Messaging - EliteMail CTI LX - Lite
Unified Messaging
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Uniform Numbering Network
Uniform Numbering Network
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
Unsupervised Conference
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
User Programming Ability
User Programming Ability
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Voice Over Split
Voice Over
Voice Prompt
Voice Response System (VRS)
Wireless
Not Supported
Wireless - DECT
Wireless DECT
SECTION 4
FEATURES
The remainder of this document provides the features for the Electra Elite IPK II
system.
2 - 10
Features

Account Code Entry
Description
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or
restrict trunk calls. Optional Account Codes allow a user to enter an Account Code while
placing a trunk call or anytime while on a call. The system does not require the user to enter
the optional account code.
Account Codes for Incoming Calls
The system can control the ability of extension users to enter Account Codes for incoming
calls. When this option is enabled, a user can dial * while on an incoming call, enter an
Account Code, and then dial * to return to their caller. If the option is disabled, any digits the
user dials after answering an incoming call outdial on the connected trunk.
A
Hiding Account Codes
Account Codes can be optionally hidden from a telephone's display. This would prevent, for
example, an unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the
display and making note of the digits that dial out. When hidden, the Account Code digits
show as the character "," on the telephone display.
Account Code Capacity
Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call
completes. Account Codes can be 1~16 digits in length using 0~9 and #.
Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes
When using the Last Number Redial, Save or Repeat Dial features, the system will not retain
Account Code information. Any number redialed with these features, the user will need to
reenter an Account Code.
If a user enters *12345*203 926 5400*67890*, if the Last Number Redial feature is used, the
system dials the number as 203 926 5400*67890*. The *67890* is not treated as an Account
Code.
Conditions
If a user enters a code that exceeds the 16 digit limit, the system ignores the
Account Code entry.
Account Code Entry
2 - 11

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g., ,1234,) appear on the
SMDR report as part of the number dialed.
Do not use an asterisk within a PBX access code when using Account Codes. Otherwise,
after the ,, the trunk will stop sending digits to the central office.
Account Codes appear on the SMDR report (even if they are hidden on the telephone's
display).
To simplify Account Code entry, store the Account Code (e.g., 1234) in a One-Touch Key.
Just press the key instead of dialing the codes.
Abbreviated Dialing bins can contain stored Account Codes. Prevent them from being
displayed using 20-07-04.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) can force a user to enter an Authorization Code prior to
using a certain route. The system verifies the ARS Authorization Code dialed against the
ARS Authorization Code list (Program 44-03).
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
2 - 12
Account Code Entry

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
One-Touch Calling
PBX Compatibility
Station Message Detail Recording
Programming
14-01-11
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Account Code
Enable (1) or disable (0) Account Codes for each trunk.
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key as an Account Code key (code 50). Use this key instead of the dial pad to
enter the , before and after the Account Code.
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to an extension.
21-01-04
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Dial Tone Detection Time
Adjust the interval the system will wait for a user to enter an Account Code. By default, this
option is set to 5 (Entries: 0-64800 seconds).
35-05-01
Account Code Setup - Account Code Mode
For each Class of Service (1~15) use this option to select the Account Code Mode. The options
are:
0
Account Codes disabled. (Any codes you enter dial out as part of your initial call.)
1
Account Codes optional (not required).
2
Account Codes required (forced) but not verifiable.
3
Account Codes required (forced) and verifiable.
35-05-03
Account Code Setup - Account Codes for Incoming Calls
For each Class of Service (1~15), enter 1 in this option to enable Account Codes for incoming
calls. Enter 0 to disable Account Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any codes you enter dial
out on the connected trunk.
35-05-04
Account Code Setup - Hiding Account Codes
For each Class of Service (1~15), enter 1 to have the system hide Account Codes on an
extension's display as they are entered. Enter 0 to have the Account Codes displayed.
Account Code Entry
2 - 13

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Operation
To enter an Account Code any time while on a trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter. You can use this procedure if your
system has Optional Account Codes enabled. You may also be able to use this procedure for incoming
calls. This procedure is not available for single line telephones.
1.
Dial ,.
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
2.
Dial your Account Code (1~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).

If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an "," character on the telephone's display.
3.
Dial ,.
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
To enter an Account Code before dialing the outside number:
If your system has Forced Account Codes, you must use this procedure. If it has Verified Account
Codes, you can use this procedure instead of letting the system prompt you for your Account Code. You
may also use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes.
If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled, be sure to choose a code programmed into your
Verified Account Code list.
1.
Access trunk for outside call.

You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code (except 9). Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing
on page 2-171 for more information.
2.
Dial ,.
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: code 50)
3.
Dial your Account Code (1~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).

If you make an incorrect entry, your system may automatically alert the operator. If Account Codes are hidden,
each digit you dial will show an "," character on the telephone's display.
4.
Dial ,.
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
2 - 14
Account Code Entry

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
5.
Dial the number you want to call.

If you hear "stutter dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting that you enter an Automatic Route
Selection Authorization Code. Refer to Automatic Route Selection on page 2-65 for more information.
To enter an Account Code for an incoming call:
This procedure is not available for single line telephones.
1.
Answer incoming call.

If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled, the following steps will dial digits out onto the connected trunk.
2.
Dial ,.
3.
Enter the Account Code.

You can enter any code of the proper length. Incoming Account Codes cannot be Forced or Verified.
4.
Dial ,.
To enter an Account Code while placing a trunk call:
If your system has Forced Account Codes, you must follow this procedure.
1.
Access trunk for outside call.

You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on page
2-171 for more information.
2.
Dial ,.
3.
Dial your Account Code (1~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).
4.
Dial ,.
5.
Dial number you want to call.

If you hear "stutter" dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting you to enter an ARS Authorization
Code. Refer to the Automatic Route Selection on page 2-65 feature for more information on ARS Authorization
Codes.
Account Code Entry
2 - 15

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
To enter an Account Code at a single line telephone:
1.
Access trunk for outside call.

You can access a trunk by dialing a code. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing for more information.
2.
Dial ,.
3.
Enter Account Code (1~16 digits).
4.
Dial ,.
5.
Dial number you want to call.

If you hear "stutter" dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting you to enter an ARS Authorization
Code. Refer to the Automatic Route Selection on page 2-65 feature for more information on ARS Authorization
Codes.
2 - 16
Account Code Entry

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
Description
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or restrict trunk
calls. The system has two types of Forced Account Codes:
J
Forced Account Codes
Forced Account Codes require an extension user to enter an Account Code every time they place
a trunk call. If the user does not enter the code, the system prevents the call. As with Account
Codes, the extension user can elect to enter an Account Code for an incoming call. However, the
system does not require it. Forced Account Codes do not block emergency assistance (911)
calls.
Once set up in system programming, you can enable Forced Account Codes on a trunk-by-trunk
basis. In addition, Forced Account Codes can apply to all outside calls or just long distance calls.
Forced Account Codes for Toll Calls restricts calls according to the following chart:
Number of Digits
If first digit is not 1
If first digit is 1
Dialed
1~3
Not allowed
Not allowed
4~7
Allowed - does not require
Allowed - requires Account Code
Account Code
More than 71
Allowed - requires Account Code
Allowed - requires Account Code
800 and 888
Allowed - requires Account Code
Allowed - does not require
Account Code
011 (International)
Allowed - requires Account Code
N/A
911
Allowed - does not require
N/A
Account Code
1 If you change the local call length in Toll Restriction, this value changes accordingly.
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
2 - 17

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
J
Verified Account Codes
With Verified Account Codes, the system compares the Account Code the user dials to a list of up
to 2000 pre-programmed codes. If the Account Code is in the list, the call goes through. If the code
dialed is not in the list, the system prevents the call. Verified Account Codes can be from 3~16
digits long using the characters 0~9 and #. During programming, you can use "wild cards" to
streamline entering codes into system memory. For example, the entry 123@ lets users dial
Verified Account Codes from 1230 through 1239.
Operator Notification
To prevent Account Code abuse, the system can notify the operator each time an Account Code
violation occurs (PGM: 20-13-20). This can happen if the user fails to enter an Account Code (if Forced)
or enters a Verified Account Code that is not in the list. The notification is an automatic Intercom call to
the attendant and a "RESTRICT" message in the operator's display. (If the attendant fails to enter a
valid Account Code, the system drops the call.)
Account Codes for Incoming Calls
The system can control the ability of extension users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls. When
this option is enabled, a user can dial * while on an incoming call, enter an Account Code, and then dial
* to return to their caller. If the option is disabled, any digits the user dials after answering an incoming
call outdial on the connected trunk.
Hiding Account Codes
Account Codes can be optionally hidden from a telephone's display. This would prevent, for example, an
unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display and making
note of the digits that dial out. When hidden, the Account Code digits show as the character "," on the
telephone display.
Account Code Capacity
Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes. Account
Codes can be 1~16 digits in length using 0~9 and #. Verified Account Codes can be from 3~16 digits
long.
Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes
When using the Last Number Redial, Save or Repeat Dial features, the system will not retain Account
Code information. Any number redialed with these features, the user will need to reenter an Account
Code.
If a user enters 12345203 926 540067890, if the Last Number Redial feature is used, the system dials
the number as 203 926 540067890. The 67890is not treated as an Account Code.
2 - 18
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
If a user enters a code that exceeds the 16 digit limit, the system ignores the Account Code
entry.
If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g., 1234) appear on the
SMDR report as part of the number dialed.
If using Forced Account Code with single line telephone you will needs a VRS to get the
prompts to enter the Forced Account Code.
When you use Forced Account Code on only toll calls and you dial a local call you will hear
a beep.
Speed Dial System/Group/Station bins can contain stored Account Codes. They can be
prevented from being displayed using 20-07-04.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) can force a user to enter an Authorization Code prior to
using a certain route. The system verifies the ARS Authorization Code dialed against the
ARS Authorization Code list (Program 44-03).
To simplify Account Code entry, store the Account Code (e.g., 1234) in a One-Touch
Key. Just press the key instead of dialing the codes.
Account Codes appear on the SMDR report (even if they are hidden on the telephone's
display).
When using a PBX/CTX trunk and Account Codes, do not use an asterisk as part of the
PBX/CTX access code. Otherwise, after the , the trunk would stop sending digits to the
central office.
Account Codes for incoming calls not available for single line telephones.
Default Settings
Account Codes are disabled.
System Availability
Terminals
Any Station
Required Component(s)
VRS for Forced Account Codes for Single Line Telephones
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
2 - 19

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
PBX Compatibility
Speed Dial System/Group/Station
Station Message Detail Recording
Programming
14-01-11
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Account Code
Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Account Codes for each trunk.
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key as an Account Code key (code 50). Use this key instead of the dial pad to
enter the , before and after the Account Code.
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-13-20
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert
In an extension's Class of Service, turn On (1) or Off (0) the Operator Alert when a forced
account code is incorrectly entered.
21-04-01
Toll Restriction Class
Use this option to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1~15) to an extension.
35-05-01
Account Code Setup - Account Code Mode
For each Class of Service (1~15) use this option to select the Account Code Mode. The options
are:
0
Account Codes disabled. (Any codes you enter dial out as part of your initial call.)
1
Account Codes optional (not required).
2
Account Codes required (forced) but not verifiable.
3
Account Codes required (forced) and verifiable.
35-05-02
Account Code Setup - Forced Account Code Toll Call Setup
For each Class of Service (1~15), enter 1 in this option to enable Forced Account Codes for just
toll calls. With this option enabled, local calls will have Optional Account Codes. Enter 0 to
enable Forced Account Codes for local and toll calls. If a user needs to dial , as part of
post-dialing digits, the , must be pressed three times (twice for the expected account code entry
and the third as the post-dialing digit).
2 - 20
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
35-05-03
Account Code Setup - Account Codes for Incoming Calls
For each Class of Service (1~15), enter 1 in this option to enable Account Codes for incoming
calls. Enter 0 to disable Account Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any codes you enter dial
out on the connected trunk.
35-05-04
Account Code Setup - Hiding Account Codes
For each Class of Service (1~15), enter 1 to have the system hide Account Codes on an
extension's display as they are entered. Enter 0 to have the Account Codes displayed.
35-06-01
Verified Account Code Table
Use this option to enter data into the Verified Account Code Table. You can enter up to 2000
codes from 3~16 digits in length. For a wild card @, press the LK 1.
40-10-01
Voice Announcement Service Option - VRS Fixed Message
Use (1) or Don't Use (0) the Fixed VRS messages.
Operation
To enter an Account Code any time while on a trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter. You can use this procedure if your
system has Optional Account Codes enabled. You may also be able to use this procedure for incoming
calls. This procedure is not available for single line telephones.
1.
Dial ,.
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
2.
Dial your Account Code (1~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).

If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an "," character on the telephone's display.
3.
Dial , .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
To enter a Forced Account Code before dialing the outside number:
If your system has Forced Account Codes, you must use this procedure. If it has Verified Account
Codes, you can use this procedure instead of letting the system prompt you for your Account Code. You
may also use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes.
If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled, be sure to choose a code programmed into your
Verified Account Code list.
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
2 - 21

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
1.
Access trunk for outside call.

You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on page
2-171 for more information.
2.
Dial ,.
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
3.
Dial your Account Code [1~16 digits, using 0~9 and # or (3~16 digits for Forced)].

If you make an incorrect entry, your system may automatically alert the operator. If Account Codes are hidden,
each digit you dial will show an "," character on the telephone's display (depending on programming).
4.
Dial ,.
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
5.
Dial the number you want to call.

If you hear "stutter dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting that you enter an Automatic Route
Selection Authorization Code. Refer to Automatic Route Selection on page 2-65 for more information.
To dial an outside number and let your system tell you when a Forced Account Code is required:
1.
Access a trunk and dial the number you want to call.

If you hear "stutter dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting that you enter an ARS Authorization
Code. Refer to Automatic Route Selection on page 2-65 for more information.
2.
Wait for your call to go through.
- OR -
3.
If you hear "Please enter an Account Code," (depending on system programming) and your
display shows ENTER ACCOUNT CODE.
N
Dial ,.
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50)
N
Dial your Account Code (3~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an "," character on the telephone's display.
N
Dial ,.
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50)
2 - 22
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
To enter an Account Code for an incoming call:
This procedure is not available for single line telephones.
1.
Answer incoming call.

If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled, the following steps will dial digits out onto the connected trunk.
2.
Dial ,.
3.
Enter the Account Code (1~16 digits).

You can enter any code of the proper length.
4.
Dial ,.
To enter a Forced Account Code at a single line telephone:
1.
Access trunk for outside call.

You can access a trunk by dialing a code. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing for more information.

With Forced Account Codes, you hear, "Please enter an Account Code."(depending on programming).
2.
Dial ,.
3.
Enter Account Code (3~16 digits).
4.
Dial ,.
5.
Dial number you want to call.

If you hear "stutter" dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting you to enter an ARS Authorization
Code. Refer to the Automatic Route Selection on page 2-65 feature for more information on ARS Authorization
Codes.
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
2 - 23

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 24
Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Alarm
Description
Alarm lets any station extension work like an Alarm clock. An extension user can have Alarm remind
them of a meeting or an appointment. There are two types of Alarms:
J
Alarm 1 (sounds only once at the preset time)
J
Alarm 2 (sounds every day at the preset time)
Conditions
Single line telephones will ring and Music on Hold will be heard when the alarm sounds.
Only a Multiline Terminal can view what time the alarm is currently set for.
Default Settings
Alarm is enabled.
System Availability
Terminals
Any Station
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
Alarm
2 - 25

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Programming
20-01-06
System Options - Alarm Duration
Set the duration of the Alarm signal (0~64800 seconds).
Operation
To set the alarm:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 727.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).

Alarm 1 sounds only once. Alarm 2 sounds each day at the preset time.
4.
Dial the alarm time (24-hour clock).

For example, for 1:15 PM dial 1315.
A confirmation tone will be heard if the alarm has been set. If the alarm was not set, an error tone will be heard
instead.
5.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker to hang up.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, hang up.
To silence an alarm:
1.
At multiline terminal, press Exit.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.

The single line set user will hear Music on Hold when the handset is lifted.
To check the programmed alarm time at a multiline terminal:
1.
Press Help.
2.
Dial 727.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).

The programmed time displays.
4.
Press EXIT.
2 - 26
Alarm

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
To cancel an alarm:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 727.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
4.
Dial 9999.
5.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker to hang up.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, hang up.
Alarm
2 - 27

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 28
Alarm

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Alphanumeric Display
Description
Multibutton display telephones have a 3-line, 24 character per line alphanumeric display that provides
various feature status messages. These messages help the display telephone user process calls,
identify callers and customize features.
The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled.
Conditions
None
Default Settings
Enabled for all display telephones.
System Availability
Terminals
All Display Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Alphanumeric Display
2 - 29

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Clock/Calendar Display
Detail Status Display on Multi-Telephone
Intercom Abandoned Call Display
Selectable Display Messaging
Programming
11-11-13
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
If needed, redefine the service code used to select the language for display multiline terminals
(default: 678).
15-02-01
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup - Display Language Selection
Select the language to be displayed on a multiline terminal display.
0 = Japanese
4 = Italian
8 = Norwegian
1 = English
5 = Spanish
9 = Danish
2 = German
6 = Dutch
3 = French
7 = Portuguese
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-11-08
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Transfer Display
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's incoming transfer
pre-answer display.
Operation
Operation is automatic if enabled in programming.
2 - 30
Alphanumeric Display

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Description
The Analog Communications Interface (ACI) feature uses a PGD(2)-U10 ADPs (Door Phone/Paging)
adapter to provide two analog ports (with associated relays) for Music on Hold, External Paging, Door
Boxes and auxiliary devices such as tape recorders and loud bells. The system allows up to 48
PGD(2)-U10 ADPs (when used for ACI ports) and 16 ACI department groups, for a maximum of 96
analog ports. Each PGD(2)-U10 ADP requires an unused port on an ESIU ETU.
Music on Hold
You can connect up to two customer-provided Music on Hold music sources to a PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
This lets you add additional music sources if the external source on the CPUII ETU or the internal source
is not adequate. By using PGD(2)-U10 ADPs, you could even have a different music source for each
trunk.
When the system switches the ACI analog port to a trunk on Hold, the PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay
associated with the ACI analog port closes. You can use this capability to switch on the music source, if
desired.
Extension users can dial the ACI analog port extension number and listen to the connected music
source. The PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay associated with the port closes when the call goes through.
For Music on Hold, connect the music source to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP module. Connect the music
source control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II Hardware Manual for
additional details.
External Paging
An ACI analog port can also be an External Page output. When connected to customer-provided
External Paging equipment, the ACI port provides External Paging. To use the External Paging, an
extension user just dials the ACI analog port extension number and makes the announcement. The
system broadcasts the announcement from the ACI analog port and simultaneously closes the
associated PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay. You can use the relay closure to control the External Paging
amplifier, if required. This external paging zone is not included in external all call paging or combination
paging (internal and external).
For External Paging, connect the Paging amplifier to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP jack. Connect the amplifier
control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II Hardware Manual for
additional details.
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 31

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Auxiliary Device Control
The PGD(2)-U10 ADP can control a customer-provided tape recorder. When an extension user dials
the ACI analog port extension number, they can automatically start the recorder and activate the record
function. When the user hangs up, the recording stops and the tape recorder turns off. For tape
recording, connect the tape recorder AUX input jack to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP jack. Connect the recorder
control leads (if available) to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional
details.
By using Department Calling, you can arrange multiple tape recorders into a pool. When an extension
user dials the Department Group pilot number, they reach the first available tape recorder in the pool.
The relays in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP can optionally control customer-provided external ringers (loud bells)
and buzzers. When an extension user dials the ACI analog port extension number, the associated
PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay closes and activates the ringer. You could use this capability to control an
emergency buzzer for a noisy machine shop floor, for example.
ACI Call Recording
ACI Call Recording allows you to use a recording device connected to a PGD(2)-U10 ADP to manually
or automatically record calls. The recording device is typically a customer-provided tape recorder. You
can set up ACI Call Recording to output to a single ACI port/recording device or to a pool of ACI ports/
devices. With a single device, all calls are stored in a centralized location. With a pool of devices, you'll
be sure to have a port available for recording - even in peak traffic periods. You can set up recording on
a per trunk or per extension basis.
When set up for manual recording, the user presses the ACI Conversation Record key (Service Code
751 + 69 + 0) to begin recording the call from that point. When set up for automatic recording, ACI Call
Recording starts automatically as soon as the user places or answers their call. The system can be
programed to record all incoming trunk calls which ring an extension. This includes the following trunk
types:
J
Central Office calls programmed to ring the extension
J
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
J
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
J
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
J
Tie lines
The system can also be programmed to record outgoing trunk calls, however, this is only possible using
E&M tie lines, PRI or BRI trunks.
ACI Call Recording is not available for intercom calls, transferred calls, or calls placed on hold and
answered by an extension with Call Recording enabled. To manually record any type of call (transferred,
ICM, outgoing CO trunk, etc.), use the Voice Mail Conversation Record key (Service Code 751 + 78).
2 - 32
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Physical Ports and Software Ports
Each PGD(2)-U10 ADP consists of a physical port for connection to the telephone system and two logical
ports. For programming purposes, the ports are also called software ports. The physical port connects to a
station position on a ESI ETU. During installation, the first PGD(2)-U10 ADP you set up is physical port 1;
the second PGD(2)-U10 ADP is physical port 2, etc. Each PGD(2)-U10 ADP has two software ports,
which are numbered independently of the physical ports. Normally, the first PGD(2)-U10 ADP set up has
software ports 1-2; the second PGD(2)-U10 ADP has software ports 3-4, etc. There are a total of 96
software ports (48 PGD(2)-U10 ADPs x 2 ports each). During programming, you assign ACI extension
numbers and Department Group options to PGD(2)-U10 ADP software ports, not physical ports. During
installation, you connect equipment to the jacks on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP that correspond to the software
port. Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II System Hardware Manual for installation details.
Conditions
ACD agents who are logged on can be recorded.
ACI software ports cannot be Background Music music sources.
An extension cannot have Hotline keys for ACI software ports. Music on Hold ACI software
ports can be Music on Hold music sources.
An extension can have One-Touch Keys for ACI software ports. The gives the extension
user:
J
One-Touch access to external music
J
One-Touch External Paging
J
One-Touch loud ringer control
ACI software ports can provide External Paging with control, independent of the External
Paging circuits on the CPUII ETU. The PGD(2)-U10 ADP can only be connected to an
ESIB(8)-U20 ETU. If the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is connected to an ESIE(8)-U20 ETU, the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP will NOT be recognized.
When an ESIB(8)-U20 ETU has an ESIE(8)-U20 ETU installed [ESIB/E(16)], the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP will have both channels available for Paging, MOH, External Ringers,
and Door Box according to strapping on ports 1-8. The corresponding port on the
ESIE(8)-U20 ETU will not support a station or other hardware (it is used by the PGD(2)-U10
ADP for channel 2).
When an ESIB(8)-U20 ETU is installed without an ESIE(8)-U20 ETU installed, a
PGD(2)-U10 ADP installed on ports 1~8 will be recognized, but only Channel 1 on the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP is supported. Channel 2 is not available.
ESIB(8)-U10 ETUs and ESIE(8)-U10 ETUs do not support the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 33

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
The devices connected to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP must be compatible with the specifications
below. Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II System Hardware Manual for installation details.
PGD(2)-U10 ADP/ACI Interface Specifications
Relay Contacts
Maximum Contact Ratings
30 V DC @ 60 mA
90 V AC @ 10 mA
Minimum Application Load
1 V DC @ 1 mA
Audio/Music Input
Input Impedance
47 K Ohms @ 1 K Hz
Maximum Input
0.4Vrms or 1.0Vp-p.
Audio/Paging Output
Output Impedance
600 Ohms @ 1 K Hz
Maximum Output
+ 3 dBm
Default Settings
No PGD(2)-U10 ADPs programmed
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
2 - 34
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Background Music
Hotline
One-Touch Calling
Paging, External
Programming
10-07-01
Conversation Record Circuits
Assign the number of conversation record circuits.
11-06-01
ACI Extension Numbering
Assign extension numbers to ACI software ports. Select a number outside of the normal
extension number range.
ACI Ports: 1~96
11-08-01
ACI Group Pilot Number
Assign pilot numbers to ACI groups. When a user dials the pilot number, they reach an available
ACI software port within the group.
ACI Groups 1~16
14-09-01
Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks - ACI Recording Destination Extension
Number
Use this option to assign the ACI Call Recording destination on a per trunk basis. The
destination can be an ACI port's extension number (assigned in Program 11-06-01) or an ACI
Department Group pilot number (assigned in Program 11-08-01). If destinations are assigned in
Programs 14-09 and 15-12, the destination in Program 15-12 will be followed.
14-09-02
Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks - ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming
Call
Determine whether a trunk should be automatically recorded when an incoming call is received.
0 = Off
1 = On
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 35

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
14-09-04
Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks - ACI Automatic Recording for Outgoing
Call
Determine whether a trunk should be automatically recorded when an outgoing call is received.
0 = Off
1 = On
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
If required, program an ACI Conversation Record Key (code 69 + 0). This key allows an
extension user to press the key to manually record a call to the ACI.
15-12-01
Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions - ACI Recording Destination
Extension Number
Use this option to assign the ACI Call Recording destination on a per extension basis. The
destination can be an ACI port's extension number (assigned in Program 11-06) or an ACI
Department Group pilot number (assigned in Program 11-08). If destinations are assigned in
Programs 14-09 and 15-12, the destination in Program 15-12 will be followed.
15-12-02
Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions - ACI Automatic
Recording for Incoming Call
Determine whether an extension should be automatically recorded when an incoming call is
received.
0 = Off
1 = On
15-12-04
Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions - ACI Automatic
Recording for Outgoing Call
Determine whether an extension should be automatically recorded when an outgoing call is
received.
0 = Off
1 = On
33-01-01
ACI Port Type Setup
Set each ACI software port for input (1) or input/output (2). Use input ports for Music on Hold
sources. Use output ports for External Paging/ringer control.
ACI Ports: 1~96
33-02-01
ACI Department Calling Group
Assign ACI software ports to ACI Department Groups. This lets ACI callers connect to ACI
software ports by dialing the group's pilot number (set in Program 11-08).
ACI Ports: 1~8
ACI Groups: 1~16
2 - 36
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Operation
To call an ACI software port:
1.
Press the idle Speaker key.
2.
Dial ACI software port extension number.
- OR -
Dial ACI Department Group extension number.
- OR -
Press the One-Touch Key for ACI extension or Department Group.
After you call an ACI software port:
J
If the port is set for input (Program 33-01-01=1) and a music source is connected, you hear music.
- OR -
J
If the port is set for output (Program 33-01-01=2) and External Paging is connected, you can page
into the external zone.
- OR -
J
If the port is set for output (Program 33-01-01=2) and a loud ringer is connected, you activate the
loud ringer.
To manually record a call an ACI software port:
1.
While on a call, press the ACI Conversation Record key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 69 + 0).

The key's LED will be lit when recording.
2.
To stop recording, press the ACI Conversation Record key once again.

The key's LED will be off when recording has stopped.
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 37

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 38
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Ancillary Device Connection
Description
Ancillary Device Connection allows installation of selected peripheral (ancillary) devices to a multiline
terminal. This feature enhances peripheral device objectives.
An Electra Elite IPK II multiline terminal user can accomplish this by using the AP(R)-R Unit (Analog Port
Adapter with Ringer) or AP(A)-A Unit (Analog Port Adapter without Ringer) for analog telephone devices,
or installing the AD(A)-R Unit to connect devices such as tape recorders.
The AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R Unit is the interface for installing a single line telephone, Modem, credit card
reader, wireless headset, NEC Conference Max Conferencing unit or other compatible analog device.
System Availability
Terminals
DTH-8-1, DTH-8D-1, DTH-16D-1, DTH-32D-1, DTH 16LD-1
Required Component(s)
AD(A)-R, AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R
Conditions
The optional device fits underneath the terminal.
Engineering Technical Information Bulletins (ETIs) provide connection instructions for the
various ancillary devices. Ancillary devices that are not covered by an ETI may not be
compatible with Electra Elite multiline terminals. Verify with NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.,
National Technical Assistance Center (NTAC) before attempting hookup.
Individual device conditions and operating procedures are provided in the applicable ETI
Bulletin and ancillary device manufacturer information.
A single line telephone connected to an APR-U/AP(R)-R Unit or APA-U/AP(A)-R Unit
cannot perform Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer and does not support a 1 terminal - 2 outside
parties conference call.
A single line telephone connected to an APR-U/AP(R)-R Unit or APA-U/AP(A)-R Unit does
not support Message Waiting Indication or Caller ID Indication.
Ancillary Device Connection
2 - 39

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default Settings
None
Related Features
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
Programming
15-03-01
SLT Signaling Type
15-03-04
Flashing
Operation
Depends on the connected ancillary device.
2 - 40
Ancillary Device Connection

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Answer Hold
Description
Answer Hold allows a multiline terminal user to press the flashing Answer key to answer an incoming
ringing call or and Camp-on call. When the multiline terminal user is already answering a call, the first
call is automatically placed on hold, depending on the user's setting in Program 15-02-06.
Conditions
When multiple incoming calls activate the Answer key LED, the LED continues to flash until
all calls are answered.
Use Program 15-02-06 (Normal Hold, Exclusive Hold) to set the type of Hold key to be
used. (Default = Normal Hold)
For calls placed in a Park Group, the LED will blink fast (green).
For calls placed in a Park Group by another user, the LED will blink slow (red).
The Answer Hold feature does not function for incoming internal calls.
CO/PBX incoming calls, not assigned to ring or assigned to another ring group, will not
activate the Answer Hold feature.
If the direct trunk appearance key is not assigned when all Call Appearance Keys are in
use, the next incoming call cannot be answered.
Default Settings
Normal Hold
System Availability
Terminals
Any Multiline Terminal
Required Component(s)
Not Applicable
Answer Hold
2 - 41

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Answer Key
Central Office Calls, Answering
Programming
15-02-06
Hold Key Operating Mode
0 = Normal Hold
1 = Exclusive Hold
15-07
Programmable Function Keys
04 = Park Group Key
11-12-32
Answer Park
Default = 06
20-09-01
Second Call for DID/ DISA/ DIL/ E&M
Default = COS 01~15 = 1
Operation
To answer a call on a different line key or CAP key with a call in progress:
1.
Receive a CO/PBX, DID/ DISA/ DIL/ E&M incoming ring.

The Answer key flashes.
2.
Press the Answer key and answer the new call.

The Answer Key LED goes out. The original call is put on hold.
3.
If additional calls are received, press the Answer key to place the current call on hold and connect
to the next call as long as Call Appearance Keys and or CO line keys are available.
2 - 42
Answer Hold

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Answer Key
Description
Multiline Terminals have an Answer key with an LED that flashes when the Multiline Terminal user
receives an incoming CO/PBX, Tie/DID transfer, or CO/PBX transfer call. When multiple calls are
received, the Answer key is used to pick up calls. The Answer key continues flashing until the last
unanswered call is answered. Press the Answer key during a call to hold the current call and allow the
next call to be answered.
Conditions
The Answer key LED functions for incoming CO/PBX calls, CO/PBX transfer/camp-on
calls, and transfer/camp-on Tie/DID calls.
Incoming calls answered by the Answer key are handled first in-first out.
An Internal call, internal transfer/camp-on call, CAR/SIE/VE calls do not activate the
Answer key LED.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals:
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s):
None
Answer Key
2 - 43

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Answer Hold
Programming
22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk.
22-04-01
Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extensions to Ring Groups.
22-05-01
Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign trunks to incoming Ring Groups.
22-07-01
DIL Assignment
Assign the destination extension or Department Calling Group for each DIL Incoming trunk.
Operation
To answer calls using the Answer key:
1.
Receive CO/PBX incoming ring.
2.
Press the Answer key.
3.
Talk with the CO/PBX incoming calling party.
4.
When additional CO incoming calls are received, press the Answer key to place the current call on
hold and connect the multiline terminal user to the next call.
2 - 44
Answer Key

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Attendant Call Queuing
Description
Attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers hear busy tone.
This helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow destination for
unanswered calls. For example, you can program Direct Inward Lines and Voice Mail calls to route to the
attendant when their primary destination is busy. With Attendant Call Queuing, these unanswered calls
would normally "stack up" for the attendant until they can be processed.
The 32 call queue total includes Intercom, DISA, DID, DIL, tie line and transferred calls. If the attendant
does not have an appearance for the queued call, it waits in line to be answered. If the attendant has
more than 32 calls queued, an extension can Transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy
Transfer enabled.
Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent, non-programmable system feature.
Conditions
Forwarding when unanswered or busy can only occur at the attendant if there are more than 32
calls in queue.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
Any Multiline Terminal assigned as an operator
Required Component(s)
None
Attendant Call Queuing
2 - 45

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Programming
20-17-01
Operator's Extension
Assign the operator (attendant's) extension.
24-02-01
System Options for Transfer - Busy Transfer
Prevent (0) or allow (1) extensions to transfer calls to an attendant that has more than 32 calls in
queue.
Operation
None
2 - 46
Attendant Call Queuing

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Description
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) uniformly distributes calls among agents of a programmed ACD
Group. When a call rings into an ACD Group, the system automatically routes the call to the agent that
has been idle the longest. Automatic Call Distribution is much more sophisticated and comprehensive
than Department Calling and other group services - it can accurately judge the work load at each agent
and distribute calls accordingly. The system allows up to 64 ACD Groups and 256 ACD agents.
You can put any agent in any group. In addition, an agent can be in more than one group only when
using AIC's). This allows, for example, a Technical Service representation to answer customer's service
calls at lunch time when many of the Customer Service representatives are unavailable.
The ACD Master Number is the "extension number" of the whole group. Calls directly ringing or
transferred to the ACD Master number enter the group and are routed accordingly. Although the master
number can be any valid extension number, you should choose a number that is out of the normal
extension range.
Automatic Call Distribution operation is further enhanced by:
ACD Call Queuing
When all agents in an ACD Group are unavailable, an incoming call will queue and cause the Queue
Status Display to occur on the ACD Group Supervisor's display. The display helps the supervisor keep
track of the traffic load within their group. The Queue Status Displays shows:
J
The number of calls queued for an available agent in the group.
J
The trunk that has been waiting the longest, and how long it has been waiting.
For each ACD Group, you can set the following conditions:
J
The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs.
J
How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs.
J
If the supervisor should hear a Queue Alarm whenever the time in queue portion reoccurs.
J
This alarm is a single beep tone that reminds the supervisor to check the condition of the queue.
ACD Overflow (With Announcements)
ACD offers extensive overflow options for each ACD Group. For example, a caller ringing in when all
agents are unavailable can hear an initial announcement (called the 1st Announcement). This
announcement can be a general greeting like, "Thank you for calling. All of our agents are currently busy
helping other customers. Please stay on the line and we will help you shortly." If the caller continues to
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 47

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
wait, you can have them hear another announcement (called the 2nd Announcement) such as, "Your
business is important to us. Your call will be automatically answered by the first available agent. Please
stay on the line." If all the ACD Group's agents still are unavailable, the call can automatically overflow to
another ACD Group or the Voice Mail. If all agents in the overflow ACD Group are busy, Lookback
Routing automatically ensures that the waiting call will ring into the first agent in either group that
becomes free.
You can assign an ACD Group with any combination of 1st Announcement, 2nd Announcement and
overflow method. You can have, for example, a Technical Service group that plays only the 2nd
Announcement to callers and then immediately overflows to Voice Mail. At the same time, you can have
a Customer Service group that plays both announcements and does not overflow.
You can assign an ACD Group to play the Queue Depth only when using the VRS for message. The
Queue Depth can be played after the 1st Announcement only, 2nd Announcement only, or after both
Announcements.
Agent Log In and Log Out Services
An ACD Agent can log in and log out of their ACD Group. While logged in, the agent is available to
receive ACD Group calls. When logged out, the agent is excluded from the group's calls. The
programmable keys and alphanumeric display on an agent's telephone show at a glance when they are
logged in or logged out.
Agent Identity Code (AIC)
An Agent Identity Code (AIC) allows ACD agents to log in any extension without setting Program
41-02-01. Using AIC, ACD agents can also log in to multiple ACD groups at the same time (up to 64
ACD Groups). The system will also allow all extensions (up to the system maximum) to log in using the
same AIC code. AIC and ACD groups for each work period (mode pattern number) can be set in
Program 41-18-01 as shown in the following example.
Mode Pattern Number
Table
Operation
AIC
#
Group
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
789
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
789
1
2
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
3
789
1
16
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
4
567
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
5
678
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
678
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
678
2
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
2 - 48
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Example:
With this example, ACD will work as follows:
Example 1: Log In with AIC 789
J During Mode Pattern 1, ACD agents will belong to ACD groups 1, 2, and 16 at the same time.
J During Mode Pattern 2, ACD agents will belong to only ACD group 1.
J During Mode Pattern 3-8, ACD agents will not belong to any ACD group and the ACD extensions will work
as normal extensions.
Example 2: Log In with AIC 567
J During Mode Patterns 1-8, ACD agents will belong to only ACD group 10.
Example 3: Log In with AIC 678
J During Mode Patterns 1-8, ACD agents will belong to ACD groups 2, 3 and 5 at the same time.
Multiple Agent Log In
ACD agents can log in any extension with multiple AICs (up to 3). Using the example setup above, ACD
will work as follows:
EXAMPLE:
Example 1: Log In with AIC 789 and 567
J During Mode Pattern 1, ACD agents will belong to ACD groups 1, 2, 10 and 16 at the same time.
J During Mode Patter 2, ACD agents will belong to ACD groups 1 and 10.
J During Mode Pattern 3-8, ACD agents will belong to only ACD group 10.
Example 2: Log In with AIC 789, 567 and 678
J During Mode Pattern 1, ACD agents will belong to ACD groups 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 and 16 at the same time.
J During Mode Pattern 2, ACD agents will belong to ACD groups 1, 2, 3, 5 and 10.
J During Mode Pattern 3-8, ACD agents will belong to only ACD groups 2, 3, 5 and 10.
Some conditions with Multiple Agent Log In:
J
ACD agents cannot log in to the system supervisor or group supervisor's extension.
J
In order to log in with AIC, the extension should be set to AIC Log In mode in Program 41-17-01.
J
If the extension is set to AIC log in mode in Program 41-17-01, the system will ignore the setting of
Program 41-02-01 for the extension.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 49

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
J
Multiple extensions (up to the maximum capacity of the extension) can log-in with one AIC. For
example, even if ACD agent "A" logs in extension 350 with AIC 789, ACD agent "B" can also log in
to extension 351 with the same AIC 789 at the same time.
J
A supervisor cannot log out an agent logged in by an AIC code.
Emergency Call
If an ACD Agent needs assistance with a caller, they can place an Emergency Call to their ACD Group
Supervisor. Once the supervisor answers the Emergency Call, they automatically monitor both the ACD
Agent and the caller. If the agent needs assistance, the supervisor can join in the conversation.
Emergency Call can be a big help to inexperienced ACD Agents that need technical advise or
assistance with a difficult caller. The supervisor can easily listen to the conversation and then "jump in" if
the situation gets out of hand.
Enhanced DSS Operation
A programmed extension user can use their DSS Console to monitor the status of the ACD Agents
within a group. The DSS Console is an essential tool for supervisors. The console key flash rates tell the
supervisor at a glance which of the group's agents are:
J
Logged onto the group (i.e., in service)
J
Logged out of the group (i.e., out of service)
J
Busy on a call
J
Placing an Emergency Call to the supervisor
J
Not available or installed
The ACD Supervisor can also use their console for placing and transferring calls - just like any other
extension user.
Flexible Time Schedules
An ACD Work Schedule lets you divide a day into segments (called Work Periods) for scheduling the
activity in your ACD Groups. You can set up four distinct Work Schedules, with up to eight Work Periods
in each Work Schedule. Each day of the week has one Work Schedule, but different days can share the
same schedule. For example, your Monday through Friday Work Schedule could consist of only two
Work Periods. Work Period 1 could be from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM - when your business is open. Work
Period 2 could be from 5:00 PM to 8:00 AM - which covers those times when your business is closed.
Headset Operation (With Automatic Answer)
An ACD Agent or ACD Group Supervisor can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the
handset. The headset conveniently frees up the user's hands for other work and provides privacy while
on the call. In addition, an ACD Agent with a headset can have Automatic Answer. This allows an agent
busy on a call to automatically connect to the next waiting call when they hang up.
2 - 50
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Incoming Call Routing
Incoming trunk calls can automatically route to specific ACD Groups. These types of calls ring directly
into the ACD Group without being transferred by a co-worker or the Automated Attendant.
Rest Mode
Rest Mode temporarily logs-out an ACD agent's telephone. There are two types of Rest Mode:
Manual Rest Mode:
An ACD Agent can enable Manual Rest Mode anytime they want to temporarily leave the ACD Group. They
might want to do this if they go to a meeting or get called away from their work area. While in Rest Mode, calls
to the ACD Group will not ring the agent's telephone.
Automatic Rest Mode:
When an ACD Group has Automatic Rest Mode, the system will automatically put an agent's telephone in Rest
Mode if it is not answered. This ensures callers will not have to wait while ACD rings an extension that will not
be answered. For multiline terminals, the system enables Automatic Rest Mode for all telephones with Rest
Mode keys. For single line telephones, you must set an option in programming to enable Automatic Rest
Mode. If an agent's telephone is placed into Rest Mode because a call is not answered, the agent will need to
manually cancel Rest Mode in order to log back into the ACD group.
With a Rest Mode key programmed on an ACD agent's telephone, when the agent is in rest mode, the key will
be lit. If the Rest Mode key is pressed while an agent is on a call, the key will flash to indicate a pre-Rest Mode
status. When the current call is finished, the agent's telephone will be in rest mode. The agent can place
intercom calls or receive direct incoming calls while in Rest Mode. The ability to receive incoming intercom
calls is defined in system programming for each ACD group. Note that an ACD System Supervisor cannot be
placed in Rest Mode.
Supervisor, ACD Group
You can designate an extension in an ACD Group to be the group's supervisor. Once assigned as an
ACD Group Supervisor, the user can:
J
Take the entire ACD Group out of service.
J
Check the log out status of each agent after the group taken down.
J
Restore the ACD Group to service.
During programming, you can choose one of three modes of operation for each ACD Group supervisor:
J
Supervisor's extension cannot receive calls to the ACD Group.
J
Supervisor's extension can only receive ACD Group calls during overflow conditions.
J
Supervisor's extension receives calls just like any other ACD Group agent.
An ACD Group can have only one supervisor. In addition, an extension can be a supervisor for only one
ACD Group.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 51

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Supervisor, ACD System
You can designate an extension as an ACD System Supervisor. Once assigned as an ACD System
Supervisor, the user can:
J
Take the all the system's ACD Groups out of service simultaneously.
J
Check the log out status of each agent after the groups are taken down.
J
Restore all the ACD Groups to service simultaneously.
The system can have only one ACD System Supervisor.
Work Time
Work Time temporarily busies-out an ACD agent's telephone so they can work at their desk
uninterrupted. This gives the agent time to fill out important logs and records as soon as they are
finished with their call. There are two types of Work Time:
Manual Work Time:
An ACD Agent can enable Manual Work Time any time they need to work at their desk undisturbed. You might
prefer this Work Time mode if an agent only occasionally has to fill out follow-up paper work after they
complete their call. When the agent is through catching up with their work, they manually return themselves to
the ACD Group.
Automatic Work Time:
The system implements Automatic Work Time for the agent as soon as they hang up their current call. This is
helpful in applications (such as Tech Service groups) where follow-up paperwork is a requirement for every
call. When the agent is done with their work, they manually return themselves to the ACD Group.
Hotline Key Shows Agent Status
An extension's Hotline keys provide the "normal" Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for co-workers and a unique
BLF for ACD Agents. Similarly to the supervisor's DSS Console BLF, the unique BLF shows when the
covered agent is in service, out of service or busy on a call. This enhanced BLF gives a department
manager, for example, ACD Group monitoring capabilities without having to become a supervisor with a
DSS Console.
Hotline gives a multiline terminal user one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hotline
partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer
calls to each other just by pressing a single key. Enhanced for ACD applications, Hotline provides a
unique Busy Lamp Field for ACD agents as well as a BLF for co-workers that are not ACD agents. The
charts below show both sets of BLF indications.
BLF For ACD Agents
When the key is . . .
The ACD Agent is . . .
Off
Idle and is not an ACD Agent
2 - 52
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
BLF For ACD Agents
On
Busy
Double Wink Off
Making an Emergency Call
Wink Off
Logged off or not installed
Double Wink On
Logged on
BLF For Co-Workers That Are Not ACD Agents
When the key is . . .
Your co-worker is . . .
Off
Idle
On
Busy or ringing
Fast
Flash In Do Not Disturb -- All calls (option 3)
or Intercom calls (option 2)
Enhanced Supervisor Options:
An ACD supervisor can individually assign extensions to ACD Groups, and set an agent's status once
assigned. This provides the supervisor with tremendous flexibility to reassign agents as work loads vary.
Queue Status Display with Scrolling:
When all agents in an ACD Group are unavailable, an incoming call will queue and cause the Queue Status
Display to occur on the ACD Group Supervisor and/or agent's display (based on the Class of Service). The
display helps the supervisor keep track of the traffic load within their group. In addition, any display multiline
terminal can have a Queue Status Display Check programmable function key. The multiline terminal user can
press this key any time while idle, and using the VOL (
) and VOL (
), scroll through the Queue Status
Displays of all the ACD Groups. The Queue Status Displays shows (see the Queue Status Display illustration
below):
N The number of calls queued.
N The trunk that has been waiting the longest, and how long it has been waiting.
The number of
calls in queue.
How long the longest queued
call has been waiting.
2 LINE-001 01:30
Name of trunk that has
been queued the longest.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 53

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
For each ACD Group, you can set the following conditions:
N The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs.
N How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs (see the Queue Status display Timing
illustration below).
N Queue Status Display holding time.
N Queue Status Alarm enable/disable.
N Queue Status Alarm sending time.
When Logged Out of ACD Group:
When ACD agents are logged out and a call is placed into the ACD queue, the telephones of the logged out
agents will display the Queue Status and hear the alarm according to the settings defined in system
programming. Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key will return the telephone to idle
until the timer in Program 41-20-03 expires again.
Do not use both 41-15-01~02 and 41-20-01~05 to set the ACD queue alarm. Select either one or the
other for the system to follow.
Available in Program
Available in Program
Feature
41-15-01~02
41-20-01~05
Queue Status
---
Yes
Display
Queue Status
---
Yes
Display Time
2 - 54
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Available in Program
Available in Program
Feature
41-15-01~02
41-20-01~05
Alarm
Yes
Yes
Alarm Send Time
Program 41-15-02
Yes
determines the length/
Interval Time of
interval of the alarm.
Yes
Queue Status
Display
Class of Service
---
Yes
Timing of alarm and
Alarm triggered after the
Alarm triggered after the
display queue
number of calls in
number of calls in
status
Program 41-15-01 is
Program 41-20-01 is
exceeded.
exceeded. Then follows
Program 41-20-03
timing for displaying
status.
If a telephone is not idle, it cannot use the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key.
The Queue Status Display is not shown and the Queue Alarm is not heard by ACD agents those in
Off-Duty mode.
In order to scroll through the ACD groups queue status, the Queue Status Display Programmable
Function key must be used. You cannot scroll when the Queue Status Display appears due to an alarm
condition.
If the Queue Status display and alarm are active and the queued called is answered/disconnected, the
display and alarm will continue until the timers in Program 41-02-02 and 41-20-05 expire.
When an overflowed call is in queue, the call will be included in its original ACD group's queue and not in
the group's queue to which it overflowed.
The Queue Status is not displayed on a supervisor's telephone based on the settings in Programs 41-
02-xx. The supervisor must use the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key to view the
queue.
Programmable Wrap-up Timer
When an agent finishes their call, the system automatically starts a wrap-up timer and blocks any ACD
calls to the agent. This gives them time to complete important logs and records before a new call comes
in. When the timer expires, the system returns the agent to the ACD Group to handle new callers.
MIS
The Elite IPK II ACD MIS is a series of Windows-based software programs designed to enhance the
ACD features of the IPK II Telephone System. The software displays both real-time data and historical
reports. Refer to the IPK II ACD MIS Supervisors Manual for more information.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 55

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
ACD Group as Overflow Destination
The system can transfer an overflow call to a specific ACD Group, off-site via a speed dial bin, Ring
Group or to voice mail using Program 41-09-01. When Program 41-08-02: ACD Overflow Destination
has the ACD Overflow Destination set to '65', the system will overflow the call to the ACD Group
programmed in Program 41-09-01. (The system will not allow you to program an ACD group with that
ACD group as the overflow.) If, while the call is ringing, the extension where the call was transferred
becomes available, both the extension and the overflow ACD group ring.
Conditions
If defined in Program 22-11-03, DID calls in queue will display the trunk name with the
Queue Status feature.
When Program 12-07-01 is customized, an agent's display will not indicate the WAIT ACD
LOGIN status, however an agent may still log in.
Conversation Recording is programmed on a system-wide basis - it is not ACD
feature-specific.
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II ACD Manual for additional information.
Default Setting
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II ACD Manual.
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
ACD Software License
Related Features
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Night Service (Universal Night Answer)
2 - 56
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Voice Mail
Programming
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II ACD Manual for complete programming information.
Operation
Using the Headset with Automatic Answer for ACD Agents:
1.
With the multiline terminal in an idle state, press the Feature key.
2.
Press the HEADSET key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: 05).

The Headset key blinks when Automatic Headset is activated.

To cancel Automatic Headset, repeat these steps.
Answering Incoming ACD Calls with a SIE Key:
1.
Press the flashing ACD SIE key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: ,03 + ACD Master number).

Ringing calls are answered in the following priority:
1. Ringing call which has heard the ACD Delayed message.
2. Ringing call which has not heard the ACD Delayed message.
3. Calls in queue (follows ACD overflow priority set in Program 41-14-03).
Transferring Trunk Calls to the ACD Pilot Number:
1.
While on an outside call, press the Transfer key.
2.
Dial the ACD Pilot number.
3.
Hang up.

The call is transferred to the ACD group.
A Supervisor can monitor an ACD call:
1.
When an ACD agent is on an outside call, the supervisor presses the MONITOR key (PGM
15-07-01 or SC 752: ,15).

The call is heard by the supervisor, but cannot participate in the call. If participation is required, use the Barge
In feature instead.
2.
To cancel the call monitoring, press the MONITOR key again.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 57

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
AIC Agent Log In
To log in:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press the ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: ,10).
- OR -
Press the Speaker key and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
2.
Dial the log in code (up to 20 digits).

This step is not required if the ID code is disabled in Program 41-01-02.
3.
Dial the Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

The ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key lights.
To log out (for single or multiple agent log ins):
Multiline Terminal
All AIC log ins become logged out.
1.
Press the ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: ,10).
2.
Dial 1 to accept.
- OR -
Press the Speaker key and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).

The ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key goes out.
Single Line Telephone
All AIC log ins become logged out.
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the AIC Log Out service code (Program 11-13-08).
- OR -
1.
To log out of an ACD group without using AIC: Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the ACD Log Out service code 655 (Program 11-13-02).
2 - 58
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Multiple Agent Log In
To log in:
Multiline Terminal
After already being logged in:
1.
Press the ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: ,10).
2.
Dial 0 to cancel the log out option.
3.
Dial the Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

The ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key lights.
- OR -
Press the Speaker key and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
4.
Dial the Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

The ACD Log In/Log Out key lights.
Single Line Telephone
Follow Steps 1~3 to log in with additional AICs (up to three) at any time.
1.
Lift the handset and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
2.
Dial the log in code (up to 20 digits).

This step is not required if the ID code is disabled in Program 41-01-02.
3.
Dial the first Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

You will hear a confirmation tone when immediately logging in with additional AICs.
4.
For second agent log: Dial the second Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

You will hear a confirmation tone.
5.
For third agent log: Dial the third Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

You will hear a confirmation tone.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 59

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Queue Status Display
When Logged Into ACD Group
1.
With an idle multiline terminal, press the Queue Status Display Programmable Function Key
(Code: ,19).

The display indicates the number of calls in queue, the trunk name, and the length of time the call has been
waiting.

When the Queue Status Display key is pressed, the queue status of the extension's group is displayed. When the
extension is not in an ACD group, the Queue Status of group 1 is displayed instead.

When an agent logs in using an AIC code, the Queue Status of the default ACD group defined in Program 41-18-
02 is displayed.
2.
Press VOL UP and VOL DOWN to scroll through the Queue Status Displays of all the ACD
Groups.
3.
Press the CLEAR key to return the telephone to an idle state.
When Logged Out of ACD Group
When ACD agents are logged out and a call is placed into the ACD queue, the telephones of the logged
out agents will display the Queue Status and hear the alarm according to the settings defined in system
programming.
Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key will return the telephone to idle until the
timer in Program 41-20-03 expires again.
Rest Mode
To set the manual Rest Mode:
Multiline Terminal
1.
With the multiline terminal in an idle state, press the ACD Rest Mode key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC
752: ,13).

The ACD Rest Mode key lights. If the Rest Mode key is pressed while the agent is on an active call, the key will
flash until the agent hangs up.

This operation is not available for the System Supervisor.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Lift the handset and dial 658.

A fast busy is heard.

To set Pre-Rest Mode (while on a call), press the hookflash and then dial 658. Press the Hookflash again to
return to the outside party. Rest Mode will begin once the call is completed.
2.
Hang up.
2 - 60
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
To cancel the manual Rest Mode:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press the ACD Rest Mode key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 752: ,13).

The ACD Rest Mode key light goes off.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Lift the handset.

A fast busy is heard.
2.
Dial 659.
3.
Hang up.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 61

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 62
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Automatic Release
Description
Automatic Release drops the line circuit when an outside party abandons the call. For this feature to
work with Loop Start Trunks, the CO/PBX providing the outside line must provide a timed disconnect
signal. Automatic Release is normally provided on Ground Start, DID, ISDN, and Tie Line trunks.
Conditions
Automatic Release on ISDN trunks is provided by the protocol.
When an outside line is accessed using a dedicated line key, the LED associated with the
line key goes off when Automatic Release occurs.
This feature functions while a call is in progress, on hold, or in a conference.
This feature applies to all ICM type calls in progress, holding or parked.
When Automatic Release occurs and the telephone is in handsfree mode, the Speaker key
automatically turns off. If using the handset the station is set to the idle condition when the
handset goes on-hook.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
Not applicable
Required Component(s)
None
Automatic Release
2 - 63

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming
14-02-09
Busy Tone Detection
0 = Disable (Default)
1 = Enable
14-02-14
Analog Trunk Data Setup - Loop Start/Ground Start
0 = Loop Start (Default)
1 = Ground Start
Operation
None
2 - 64
Automatic Release

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Automatic Route Selection
Description
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) provides call routing and call restriction based on the digits a user
dials. ARS gives the system the most cost-effective use of the connected long distance carriers.
ARS is an on-line call routing program that you can customize (like other system options) from a display
telephone. ARS accommodates 400 call routing choices - without a custom-ordered rate structure
database. With ARS, you can modify the system's routing choices quickly and easily. This is often
necessary in today's telecommunications world where the cost structure and service choices frequently
change.
The ARS feature can add or delete digits and route calls according to pre-determined levels. When
Electra Elite IPK II systems are networked together by Tie lines or K-CCIS, the networked systems can
be called by a system number and a user's extension number, just an extension number, or by using a
trunk access code.
ARS Feature Summary
ARS provides:
J
Call Routing
ARS can apply up to 24-digit analysis to every number dialed. For programming, ARS provides
separate 8-digit and 24-digit tables. Each table can have up to 250 numbers.
J
Dialing Translation (Special Dialing Instructions)
ARS can automatically execute stored dialing instructions (called Dial Treatments) when it
chooses a route for a call. The system allows up to 15 Dial Treatments. The Dial Treatments can:
N Insert or delete an area code (NPA)
N Add digits (such as a dial-up OCC number), pauses and waits to the dialing sequence
N Require the user to enter an authorization code when placing a call (refer to Program 44-03)
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 65

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
J
Time of Day Selection
For routing purposes, ARS provides ten different day selections (called Time Schedule Patterns).
Each Time Schedule Pattern can provide up to 20 time intervals which are assigned to one of the
eight day/night modes. The Time Schedule Patterns are then assigned to a day of the week
(Monday~Friday, Saturday, Sunday or Holiday).
J
Hierarchical Class of Service Control
ARS allows or denies call route choices based on an extension's ARS Class of Service. This
allows lower Classes of Service (e.g., 1) to access routes unavailable to higher Classes of Service
(e.g., 16). The system provides up to 16 (0=unrestricted, 1~16) ARS Classes of Service.
J
Separate Routing for Selected Call Types
To provide unique control, you can program separate routing instructions for:
N Directory assistance (411, 1411 and 555) calls
N Emergency (911) calls
J
Separate Routing for Equal Access (1010XXX) Calls
Choose different routing for directly-dialed (1010XXX + 1) and operator-assisted (1010XXX + 0)
Equal Access calls.
Basic ARS Operation
When a user places an outside call, ARS analyzes the digits dialed and assigns one of 400 Selection
Numbers to the call. The Selection Number chosen depends on which digits the user dialed. ARS then
checks the time of day, the day of week and the extension's ARS Class of Service. Based on these call
routing options, ARS selects a trunk group for the call and imposes the Dial Treatment instructions (if
any).
Class of Service Option Allows Outgoing Calls to Not Follow Access Map
Using this option allows an extension's Class of Service to be set so that ARS does not follow the trunk
access map settings (Program 14-07-01 and 15-06-01). The feature allows an extension user to have
CO line keys on their telephone which allow incoming access only. The user would only have outgoing
access on the CO lines when using ARS to place a call.
2 - 66
Automatic Route Selection

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conditions
Do not use ARS behind a Centrex/PBX.
ARS is intended for areas that use the North American Number Plan (NANP).
Line keys, Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, outgoing trunk group keys, dialing 704 + trunk
group, dialing +trunk number, and abbreviated dial numbers assigned to a certain trunk
group can all be used to by-pass ARS.
If there is no PBX access code entered in the Dial Treatment, the system will still be able to
dial 911.
Toll Restriction overrides ARS.
A system with Automatic Route Selection cannot also have Trunk Group Routing.
With ARS installed, Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route. The
system automatically redials the queued call when the extension user lifts the handset.
Abbreviated Dialing may bypass ARS routing.
Set up other options for outgoing calls (e.g., unassign line keys, adjust gains, ARS access
key, Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, etc.).
Refer to the Dial Tone Detection feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial
Tone Detection.
ARS does not permit 0 and 011+ calls to be routed out separate trunk groups. The IPK II
will only support direct trunk selection for dial 0 (Operator) type calls.
If an entry of 911 is programmed in ARS, but ARS is turned off, 911 calls will still attempt to
route using ARS.
Default Setting
ARS is off (disabled) at default.
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
None
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 67

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station
Central Office Calls, Placing
Dial Tone Detection
E-911 Compatibility
Code Restriction
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
Programming
11-01-01
System Numbering
Set the system's internal (Intercom) numbering plan. The numbering plan assigns the first and
second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other
extensions and features, such as service codes and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan
does not meet the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site.
11-09-01
Trunk Access Code
Specify the single digit code used to access ARS (normally 9).
14-05-01
Trunk Groups
Program trunks of the same carrier type into the same trunk group.
14-07-01
Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets the access options for trunks.
Trunk Access Maps: 1~200
15-06-01
Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions.
Trunk Access Maps: 1~200
20-03-04
System Options for Single Line Telephones - Dial Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS
When ARS or an analog extension user accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the system
waits this interval before outdialing the first digit (0~64800 seconds).
2 - 68
Automatic Route Selection

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-08-17
Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service), ARS Override of Trunk Access Map
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to override the trunk access map programming
(Program 14-07-01 and 15-06-01) for outgoing calls.
26-01-01
Automatic Route Selection Service - ARS Service
Enable (1) or disable (0) ARS.
26-01-02
Automatic Route Selection Service - Network Outgoing Inter-Digit ARS Timer
With Networking, this timer (0~64800 msec.) replaces 20-03-04 when determining if all network
protocol digits have been received. If ARS is enabled at Site B, this timer can be programmed
for 5 (500 msec) at Site A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is using F-Route for outbound dialing,
this timer should be programmed for 30 (3 seconds) at Site A.
26-01-03
Automatic Route Selection Service - ARS Misdialed Number Handling
If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS, this option determines if the system should
route over trunk group 1 (0) or play error tone (1).
26-01-06
ARS/LCR Class Of Service Match Access
With the ARS Class of Service Match Access feature, you can determine whether the system
should allow a call based on the COS assigned to the Dial Analysis Table (Program 26-02).
This change can be used to create a tenant-like application. It will then use the trunk group set
in the Additional Entry in Program 26-02-03 to place the out-going call. When this feature is
enabled, the calls will be routed in sequential order, and will forward - provided the Class of
Service for the trunk groups match. 0 = Disabled (COS not compared), 1 = Enabled (COS
Match Access)
26-02-01
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR - Dial
Enter the digits (16 digits maximum: 1~9, 0 , #, @; 400 separate entries) for the Dial Analysis
Table which will be analyzed by ARS/LCR. This table will be checked after any programmed F-
Route operations have completed. The system will then refer to Program 26-02-02 and 26-02-03
to determine the routing for the call. To enter a wild card/don't care digit, press Line Key 1 to
enter an @ symbol. It is important to remember that the system checks the table numbers in
numerical order. This means that entries for specific numbers should be entered first (such as
your local area codes), then enter the items containing wild card digits. If the system sees an
entry of "2@@" then any table entries which follow will be ignored.
For example, if 268, 269, and 270 are local exchanges, these would be the first three table
entries which would route according to the settings made in Program 26-02-02 and 26-02-03 for
each of the table entries. If the next entry is "2@@", then the system checks no further in this
program and routes all other "2xx" numbers according to the entries made in Program 26-02-02
and 26-02-03 for this table entry.
26-02-02
Dial Analysis Table for ARS - Service Type
For each Dial Analysis Table (1-200), select `0' for no ARS, `1' for Service Type 1 - Route to Trunk
Group Number to have the number route to a trunk group [Refer to Program 26-02-03] or `2' for
Service Type 2 - F-Route Selected to have the dialed number controlled by the F-Route table. If
Service Type 2 is selected and F-Route operation is on, the F-Route table used is determined by
Program 44-04. If F-Route operation is off, the routing is determined by Program 44-05.
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 69

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
26-02-03
Dial Analysis Table for ARS - Additional Data / Service Number
For each Dial Analysis Table (1~200), if Service Type 1 was selected in Program 26-02-02,
enter the trunk group number (0~100, 0 = No Route).
26-02-04
Dial Analysis Table for ARS - ARS Class of Service
For each Dial Analysis Table (1~200), set the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Class of Service
(0-16).
26-02-05
Dial Analysis Table for ARS - Dial Treatment
For each Dial Analysis Table (1~200), set the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Dial Treatment
(0~15) to be used.
26-03-01
ARS Dial Treatments
Assign the Dial Treatments (1~15) for automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments
to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The ARS Dial Treatment options are:
H
3 - Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial call. This requires at least eight digits in the ARS
table (Program 26-02-01).
H
2 - Delete the leading digit if dialed as part of the initial call. This requires at least eight digits in
the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
H
1 - Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the initial call. This requires at least eight digits in the
ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
H
INPA - Insert the NPA specified by NPA.
H
DNN - Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example, D041234
out-dials 124. Valid entries are 0~9, #, ,, Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause). Each digits code
counts as a digit. So for example, if a P was added for a pause, the entry would look like:
D05P1234. This Dial Treatment can only be added from telephone programming.
H
Wnn - Wait nn seconds.
H
P - Pause in analog trunk.
H
R - Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications.
H
E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.
H
X - When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment in order for the system to
output the extension number of the call's originator to the black box for the E911 feature.
26-04-01
ARS Class of Service
Set an extension's ARS Class of Service (0~16). Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of
Service when determining how to route an extension's calls.
26-11-01
Transit Network ID Table
Enter the Transit Network Selection information element to be added to an ARS call using an
ISDN trunk. This information element identifies a requested transit network.
2 - 70
Automatic Route Selection

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
44-01-01
System Options for ARS/F-Route
Select whether the ARS/F-Route feature should use the time schedule (0=not used, 1=used). If
this option is set to `0', the F-Route table selected is determined only by the digits dialed without
any relation to the day or time of the call. If this option is set to `1', the system first refers to
Program 44-10. If there is a match, the pattern defined in that program is used. If not, the F-
Route pattern in Program 44-09 and time setting in 44-08 are used.
44-02-01
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Dial
Set the Dial digits for the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route (8 digits max: 1~9, 0
, #, @). To enter a wild card/don't care digit, press Line Key 1 to enter an @ symbol.
44-02-02
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Service Type
Set the Service Type (0-3) for the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route.
0 = No Setting
1 = Extension Call
2 = ARS/F-Route Table
3 = Dial Extension Analyze Table
44-02-03
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Additional Data
If a Service Type is selected in Program 44-02-02, set the additional data, if required, for the
Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route (24 digits max: 1~9, 0 , #, @). To enter a wild
card/don't care digit, press Line Key 1 to enter an @ symbol.
44-02-04
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Dial Tone Simulation
Determine if the Dial Tone Simulation is on (1) or off (0) for the Pre-Transaction Table for
selecting ARS/F-Route. If enabled, this option sends dial tone to the calling party once the
routing is determined. This may be required if the central office at the destination does not send
dial tone.
44-03-01
Dial Analysis Extension Table - Dial
Set the Dial digits (24 digits max: 1~9, 0 , #, @) to be used for the Dial Extension Analysis
Table. When Program 44-02-02 is set to type "3", this program sets the dial extension analysis
table. These tables are used when the analyzed digits must be more than 8 digits. To enter a
wild card/don't care digit, press Line Key 1 to enter an @ symbol.
44-03-02
Dial Analysis Extension Table - Table Number
When dialed digits match the setting in Program 44-03-01, select the ARS/R-Route table
number (0~500) to be used for the Dial Extension Analysis Table.
44-03-03
Dial Analysis Extension Table - Table Number (251)
If the received digits are not identified in tables 1~250, the F-Route selection table number
(0~500) defined in table 251 is used.
44-03-04
Dial Analysis Extension Table - Next Table Number
If the received digits do not match the digits set in tables 1~250, table number 252 is used refer
to the next Extension Table Area (1~4) to be searched.
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 71

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
44-04-01
ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule
Assign each ARS/F-Route Selection number (1~500) to an ARS/F-Route table number for each
ARS/F-Route time mode. There are eight time modes for ARS/F-Route Access.
44-05-01
ARS/F-Route Table - Trunk Group Number
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500) assign a priority number (1~4) and enter the trunk number
to be used.
0 = No Setting
101~150 = Networking
255 = Extension Call
44-05-02
ARS/F-Route Table - Delete Digits
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500) assign a priority number (1~4). Enter the number of digits
to be deleted (0~255) from the dialed number.
44-05-03
ARS/F-Route Table - Additional Dial Number Table
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500) assign a priority number (1~4). Enter the table number
(defined in Program 44-06) for additional digits to be dialed (0~1000).
44-05-04
ARS/F-Route Table - Beep Tone
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500) assign a priority number (1~4). Select whether or not a
beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is used.
0 = No Beep
1 = Beep
44-05-05
ARS/F-Route Table - Gain Table Number for Internal Call
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500) assign a priority number (1~4). Select the gain table
number to be used for internal calls (0~500).
44-05-06
ARS/F-Route Table - Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500) assign a priority number (1~4). Select the gain table
number to be used for tandem connection (0~500).
44-05-07
ARS/F-Route Table - ARS Class of Service
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500) assign a priority number (1~4). Select the Class of Service
to be used for ARS (0~16). An extension's ARS COS is determined in Program 26-04-01.
44-05-08
ARS/F-Route Table - Dial Treatment
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500) assign a priority number (1~4). Select the Dial Treatment
to be used (0~15). The Dial Treatments are defined in Program 26-03-01.
44-05-09
ARS/F-Route - Max Digit Assignment
For each ARS/F-Route table (1~500) assign the priority (1~4). Set the maximum digits to be
dialed (1~99) for each ARS/F-Route table.
2 - 72
Automatic Route Selection

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
44-06-01
Additional Dial Table
If an Additional Dial Number Table is entered in Program 44-05-03, define the additional dial
table (1~1000) to add digits in front of the dialed ARS/F-Route number (24 digits max: 1-9, 0 , #,
Pause). To enter a wild card/don't care digit, press Line Key 1 to enter a P (pause) symbol.
44-07-01
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Incoming Transmit
44-07-02
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Incoming Receive
44-07-03
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Outgoing Transmit
44-07-04
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Outgoing Receive
Set the gain table to be used (1-500). If an extension dials ARS/F-Route number;
H
The Extension Dial Gain Table is activated, which is assigned in Program 44-05.
H
The Extension Dial Gain Table follows "Outgoing transmit" and "Outgoing receive" settings.
If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route;
H
The Tandem Gain Table is activated, which is assigned in Program 44-05.
H
The Tandem Gain Table follows the "Incoming transmit" and "Incoming receive" settings for
incoming line, and "Outgoing transmit" and "Outgoing receive" settings for the outgoing line.
For ARS/F-Route calls, the CODEC gains defined in Program 14-01-02 and 14-01-03 are not
activated.
44-08-01
Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Define the daily pattern of the ARS/F-Route feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These
patterns are used in Program 44-09 and 44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings.
44-09-01
Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Define a weekly schedule for using ARS/F-Route (day numbers 1~7 (1 = Sun, 7 = Sat), pattern
numbers (1~10). The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01.
44-10-01
Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Define a yearly schedule for ARS/F-Route. This schedule is used for setting special days such
as national holidays (pattern numbers 1~10). The pattern number is defined in Program
44-08-01.
80-03-01
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
Use Items 11~32 to set the criteria for dial tone detection for outgoing ARS calls.
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 73

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Operation
To place a call using ARS:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press idle Speaker key.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.

You will hear normal Intercom dial tone.
2.
Dial 9.

You will hear a second, "stutter" dial tone.
3.
Dial the outside number.

If you hear another "stutter" dial tone, you must enter your extension's ARS Authorization Code.
2 - 74
Automatic Route Selection

Background Music
Description
Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer -provided music source to the
speakers of the Multiline Telephone when the station is idle.
Conditions
An ACI (PGD(2)-U10 ADP) port must be used as an alternate External Music on
Hold source when different External MOH and BGM source is required.
Background Music stops while the Multiline Terminal is in use.
Originating a call, answering a voice announcement, a ringing call, or internal
B
paging interrupts Background Music.
Background Music is not available on single line telephones.
ESIB(8)-U10 ETUs and ESIE(8)-U10 ETUs do not support the PGD(2)-U10
ADP.
When a ESIB(8)-U20 ETU is installed without an ESIE(8)-U20 ETU installed, a
PGD(2)-U10 ADP installed on ports 1~8 will be recognized, but only channel 1
on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is supported. Channel 2 is not available.
When a ESIB(8)-U20 ETU has an ESIE(8)-U20 ETU installed [ESIB/E(16)], the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP will have both channels available for Paging, Music on Hold,
External Ringers and Door Box according to strapping on ports 1~8. The
corresponding port on the SIE(8)-U20 ETU will not support a station or other
hardware (it is used by the PGD(2)-U10 ADP for channel 2).
The PGD(2)-U10 ADP can only be connected to an ESIB(8)-U20. If the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP is connected to an ESIE(8)-U20 ETU, the PGD(2)-U10 ADP
will NOT be recognized.
Default Settings
Background Music (BGM) is allowed
Background Music
2 - 75

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
Externally provided Music Source.
PGD(2)-U10 ADP if different external MOH and BGM sources are required.
Related Features
Music on Hold
Programming
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-13-30
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Background Music
For extension Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) an extension from turning Background
Music on and off.
Operation
To turn Background Music on or off:
1.
Press idle Speaker key.
2.
Dial 725.
3.
Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 76
Background Music

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Barge-In
Description
Barge-In permits an extension user to break into another extension user's established call, including
Conference calls. This sets up a Conference-type conversation between the intruding extension and the
parties on the initial call. With Barge-In, an extension user can get a message through to a busy
co-worker right away.
There are two Barge-In modes: Monitor Mode (Silent Monitor) and Speech Mode. With Monitor Mode,
the caller Barging In can listen to another user's conversation but cannot participate. With Speech Mode,
the caller Barging In can listen and join another user's conversation.
Caution
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor,
retrieve, or record telephone conversation or other sound activities, whether
or not contemporaneous with transmission, may be illegal in certain
circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought
prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone
conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification
to all parties to a telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other
notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone
conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the telephone conversation.
Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Conditions
An extension user can barge in on a conference.
An extension user cannot barge in on an Intercom call if one of the intercom callers is using
Handsfree Answerback. Both Intercom parties must have lifted the handset or pressed the
Speaker key.
With Program 20-13-10 set to "0", a call which has been barged into can be placed on hold
by the originator of the outside call. Both the outside caller and the extension, which barged
into the call, are placed on hold.
Barge-In
2 - 77

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
With Program 20-13-10 set to "1", a call which has been barged into can be placed on Park
by the originator of the outside call, but only the outside caller is placed in Park. The
extension which barged into the call is dropped.
Privacy blocks Barge-In attempts.
Function keys simplify the Barge-In operation.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Conference
Hold
Intercom
Off-Hook Signaling
Park
Privacy (Data)
Programmable Function Keys
2 - 78
Barge-In

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Programming
11-12-08
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Barge-In
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to use the Barge-In feature
(default = 710).
11-16-02
One-Digit Service Code Setup - Barge-In
Use this option to set up Item 02 for single digit Barge-In. For example, you can assign Item 02
to use digit 5 for Barge-In. This would allow you to program a function key with an extension
number plus the Barge-In code (i.e., 5). This allows one-touch access to the Barge-In feature for
extension.
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Barge-In (code 34).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-13-10
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge-In Mode
For extension's Class of Service, enable the Barge-In Speech Mode (0) or Monitor Mode (1) at
the initiating extension (i.e., Barge-In initiator).
20-13-15
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge-In, Initiate
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Barge-In at the initiating extension
(i.e., Barge-In initiator).
20-13-16
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge-In, Receive
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Barge-In at the receiving extension
(i.e., Barge-In receive).
20-13-17
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge-In Tone/Display
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the Barge-In (Intrusion) Tone. If
disabled, this also turns off the Barge-In display at the called extension.
20-13-32
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Multiple Barge-In
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to have
multiple user's Barge-In to their conversation.
20-14-11
Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M - DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) a DISA or tie trunk user from using
the Barge-In feature with the service code defined in Program 11-12-08.
20-18-07
Service Tone Timer - Intrusion Tone Repeat Time
After a user barges in, the system repeats the Barge-In tone after this interval.
Barge-In
2 - 79

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
21-01-03
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Trunk Interdigit Time (External)
Program how long an extension must wait before using the Barge-In feature can be used on a
call (this timer waits until this timer expires before putting a call in a talk state). This timer also
affects Voice Over.
Operation
To Barge-In after calling a busy extension:
The timer in 21-01-03 has to have expired before you can Barge-In.
1.
Call a busy extension.
2.
Press Barge-In key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: 34).
To Barge in without first calling the busy extension:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial 710.
- OR -
Press Barge-In key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: 34).
3.
Dial busy extension.
Q
The extension user will hear a warning tone.
Q
The DISA user will be rerouted to the defined ring group.
Q
The tie line user will hear a busy tone.
- OR -
The following steps are not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks:
1.
Dial the extension number of the busy internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710.
2 - 80
Barge-In

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
To Barge-In to a Conference Call:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker and dial the service code (default = 710).

If the telephone does not have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user hangs up, the system
automatically places a callback to the extension.
2.
Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a conference call.
N
When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the Conference,
depending on system programming, and all display multiline terminals show the joined party. If a
Conference is not possible:
Q
The extension user will hear a warning tone.
Q
The DISA user will be rerouted to the defined ring group.
Q
The tie line user will hear a busy tone.
Not available for DISA or tie line trunks.
- OR -
1.
Dial the extension number of the internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710.
Barge-In
2 - 81

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 82
Barge-In

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Battery Backup System Memory
Description
A battery is provided on the CPUII( )-U( ) ETU for the Electra Elite IPK II system to retain System
Program Memory when power fails. When fully charged, the battery maintains backup power for
approximately seven years. System Data, Speed Dial Memories, and Clock/Calendar functions are
protected by the backup battery. After power is restored, the system returns to normal operation.
For additional storage time, the database and Caller ID History can be copied to the Compact Flash card on
the CPUII( )-U( ).
Conditions
The battery on the CPUII( )-U( ) ETU should be removed during long term storage but must
be installed (protection against loss of power) just before ETU installation to provide battery
backup for System Memory.
When fully charged, the battery retains System Memory for approximately seven years.
During normal operation, the battery is continually recharged using a built-in charging
circuit from the CPUII( )-U( ) ETU.
Battery backup on the CPUII( )-U( ) ETU does not protect the following:
J
Callback
J
Off-line Status (for programming system or station assignments)
J
Repeat Redial
J
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
J
Caller ID History
Default Settings
None
The battery must be installed on the CPUII( )-U( ) ETU prior to programming a customer's database.
Battery Backup System Memory
2 - 83

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
System Availability
Terminals
Not applicable
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Battery Backup - System Power
Programming
90-03-01
Save Data
1 = Save Data
User Service code #,#9 (Default PRG 11-15-03) to save the Caller ID History from working
memory to SRAM.
Operation
None
2 - 84
Battery Backup System Memory

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Battery Backup System Power
Description
A built-in battery provides complete system operating power for approximately 30 minutes during
commercial power outages. When optional (locally provided) batteries are connected and fully charged,
full system operation can be maintained for an extended time. Actual time depends on system
configuration, traffic conditions, and the capacity of the batteries.
Conditions
During normal operation, the batteries are continually recharged by a built-in charging
circuit.
The B64-U( ) KSU is equipped with batteries for system battery backup.
External Battery Back can be connected to the system to provide extended time in the
event of commercial power outage. Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II System Hardware
Manual for further details.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
Not applicable
Required Component(s)
B64-U( ) KSU
Battery Backup System Power
2 - 85

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Battery Backup - System Memory
Programming
None
Operation
None
2 - 86
Battery Backup System Power

Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Description
This feature automatically places an outside call on a Call Appearance key when the system
is operated as a hybrid (Multifunction) system. These keys can be assigned on any Multiline
Terminal or the same key can appear on multiple terminals. This feature allows efficient call
handling when numerous CO calls are received and a limited number of CO line key
appearances are available.
Once a Call Appearance (CAP) Key call is set up, the user can handle it like any other trunk
call. For example, the user can place the call on hold, transfer it to a co-worker or send it to a
park orbit. An incoming call will be answered on the first available CAP key, beginning with
the lowest numbered key. If keys 1~3 are Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, for example, the first
incoming call will be answered on key 1. If key 1 is busy, the next call will be answered on key
C
2. If keys 1 and 2 are busy, the next call will be answered on key 3. If all three keys are busy,
additional incoming calls queue for the first available key.
Conditions
A trunk call that is originated or answered at a multiline terminal must appear on
a line key. The line key can be assigned as the Trunk Key, or as a Call
Appearance Key. A CAP is dynamic because it is used for any trunk call. An
8-button multiline terminal can have eight CAP keys that allow the telephone to
process all trunks, eight trunks at a time.
Multiline terminals can be assigned to the same CAP Key. Trunk calls that
appear on the same CAP Key at multiple stations will have the same visual
appearance of the call (Busy or Hold).
Any held call left on a CAP key for more than the programmed time recalls to the
multiline terminal where the call was originally put on hold.
When a multiline terminal (other than the one that originally initiated or received
a call) is used to retrieve a held call, the SMDR records a transfer to the multiline
terminal where the call was retrieved.
Only outside lines use a CAP key.
A multiline terminal can have multiple CAP keys assigned to it.
Outside lines reside on the CAP key in the order of lowest to highest line key
number on the station. For instance, when line keys 1, 2 and 3 are CAP keys,
the first call resides on line key 1, the second call resides line key 2 and third call
resides line key 3.
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
2 - 87

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
All Flexible Line keys on a multiline terminal can be assigned as CAP keys in System
Programming.
A conference call involving two outside lines cannot reside on one Call Appearance key.
For Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, trunks must be assigned to trunk group 1 or higher
(Program 14-05-01). Trunk Group 0 means KF (Key Function) mode.
CAP Keys can be programmed from 0001~9999. 0000 assigns the next available CAP
Key.
Trunk Group (,02), Virtual Extension (,03) and Call Appearance (CAP) Key (,08), codes
can not be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the
additional data required.
If you have a trunk line key and Call Appearance (CAP) Key for the same trunk, the line key
has priority. An incoming call rings the trunk line key and when answered, the trunk line
keys lights, not the CAP Key. When you access the trunk for an outgoing call, the Trunk
line key lights, not the Call Appearance (CAP) Key.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
Not applicable
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Call Arrival Keys (CAR)
2 - 88
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Off-Hook Signaling
Programmable Function Keys
Secondary Incoming Extension
User Programming Ability
Virtual Extensions
Programming
14-05-01
Trunk Groups
Assign trunks to trunk groups (1~100).
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a key as a CAP key (code 8) plus a CAP orbit number (01~64).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to extensions.
20-11-19
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Normal/Extended Park
Determine whether an extension's Class of Service should allow normal or extended Park
(0 = Normal for 24-01-06, 1 = Extended for 24-01-07).
24-01-02
System Options for Hold - Hold Recall Callback Time
A call that is parked longer than the programmed interval recalls the extension where it was
initially parked.
24-01-06
System Options for Hold - Park Hold Time
Set the Park Hold Time (0~64800 seconds). A call that is parked longer than the programmed
interval recalls the extension where it was initially parked.
Refer to Flexible System Numbering on page 2-407 for setting Flexible Timeouts for Class of
Service.
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
2 - 89

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
24-01-07
System Options for Hold - Extended Park Hold Time
Set the Extended Park Hold Time (0~64800 seconds). A call that is parked longer than the
programmed interval recalls the extension where it was initially parked.
Operation
To place an outgoing call on hold and retrieve it using a multiline terminal:
1.
Go off-hook using the handset and wait for internal dial tone.
- OR -
Press the Speaker key and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code (default: 9).
3.
Dial the outside party (the Call Appearance key lights). Begin your conversation.
4.
Press the Hold key (the Call Appearance key flashes).
5.
Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call.
To receive an incoming call, put it on hold and then retrieve it using a Multiline Terminal:
1.
Receive CO/PBX incoming ring.
2.
Go off-hook using the handset, or press the Speaker key (the Call Appearance key lights). Talk
with outside party.
3.
Press the Hold key (the Call Appearance key flashes).
4.
Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call.
2 - 90
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Description
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys are available software extensions available on the Basic and Expanded Port
Packages. A Call Arrival Extension assigned to a line key, can appear and ring on an individual station
or multiple stations. Call Arrival Keys are only busy when in the ringing state and are not used during the
talking state.
Call Arrival Keys are shared with the Virtual Extensions (VE's). In virtual extension mode, the key acts
as a secondary extension. Up to 256 CAR/VE keys are provided.
Conditions
There are 256 available ports/extensions shared between CAR keys and virtual extensions.
The 256 available ports/extensions are assigned on a per extension basis for CAR key
mode or virtual extension (VE) key mode.
More than one extension can share a CAR key.
An extension can have more than one CAR key assigned.
Up to 32 incoming calls can be queued to busy CAR key.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
Not applicable.
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
2 - 91

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Call Queuing
Virtual Extensions
Programming
11-04-01
Virtual Extension Numbering
Virtual Extension Ports (V-Port) = 1~256
Virtual Extension Number = Extension Number
15-01-01
Basic Extension Data Setup - Extension Name
Assign the extension name.
15-02-07
Automatic Hold for CO Lines
0 = Hold
1 = Disconnect
15-01-05
Basic Extension Data Setup - Restriction for Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
Enable (1) or disable (0) supervised dial detection for an extension.
15-02-21
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup, Virtual Extension Access Mode
Virtual Extension Key Mode 0 = DSS (default)
1 = OTG (Outgoing)
2 = Ignore
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
KYxx = Key Number 01~32
KY01 = 03 (01 by default)
15-08-01
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
ICM Tone Pattern 0 = Pattern 1 (default)
1 = Pattern 2
2 = Pattern 3
3 = Pattern 4
15-09-01
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Mode1:
0 = No (default)
1 = Yes
2 - 92
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
15-10-01
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Order 1 Pattern 0 = Pattern 1 (default)
Order 2 Pattern 1 = Pattern 2 (default)
Order 3 Pattern 2 = Pattern 3 (default)
Order 4 Pattern 3 = Pattern 4 (default)
15-11-01
Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
KY01 Mode1: 1 = Yes
0 = No
15-18-01
Virtual Extension Key Mode
0 = Release
1 = Land On
15-18-02
Virtual Key Display for Outgoing ICM calls
0 = Virtual Extension
1 = Real Extension
20-04-03
System Options for Virtual Extensions - Call Arrival (CAR) Key Delay Interval
Delay = 10 sec. (default)
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Mode1: Class No. = 1 (default)
20-07-10
Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance Level)
1 = On (default)
0 = Off
20-10-08
Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Auto Off-Hook Answer for Call Arrival (CAR)
Keys
0 = Off (default)
1 = On
20-13-27
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension
1 = On (default)
0 = Off
21-01-15
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
0 = Off (default)
1 = On
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
2 - 93

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
23-04-01
Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Order 1 Stg Group = 0~64 ( 0 by default)
Order 2 Stg Group = 0~64 ( 0 by default)
Order 3 Stg Group = 0~64 ( 0 by default)
Order 4 Stg Group = 0~64 ( 0 by default)
Operation
To answer a call ringing a Call Arrival (CAR) Key:
1.
Press the flashing Call Arrival (CAR) Key.
To place a call to a Call Arrival (CAR) Key:
1.
Lift the handset, or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the CAR key's extension, or press the Call Arrival (CAR) Key.

The operation depends on the setting in PRG 15-02-21.
To program a Call Arrival (CAR) Key on a telephone:
1.
Press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial 752.
3.
Press the key you want to program.
4.
Dial 03.
5.
Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key.
6.
Press Hold once for Immediate Ring

To set for Delayed Ring, skip to Step 8.
7.
Dial the Mode number in which the key will ring.
1 = Day 1
5 = Day 2
2 = Night 1
6 = Night 2
3 = Midnight 1
7 = Midnight 2
4 = Rest 1
8 = Rest 2
8.
Press Hold to set up Delayed Ring.
- OR -
Skip to Step 10.
2 - 94
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
9.
Dial the mode number in which the key will delay ring.
1 = Day 1
5 = Day 2
2 = Night 1
6 = Night 2
3 = Midnight 1
7 = Midnight 2
4 = Rest 1
8 = Rest 2
10.
Press Speaker key.
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
2 - 95

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 96
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Call Duration Timer
Description
Call Duration Timer lets a multiline terminal with a LCD to time their trunk calls on the telephone display.
This helps users that must keep track of their time on the telephone. For incoming trunk calls, the Call
Timer begins as soon as the user answers the call.
Conditions
The Call Timer starts over each time the call is retrieved from Hold or Park.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with an LCD
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display
Programming
20-13-36
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Call Duration Timer
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's Call Timer.
Call Duration Timer
2 - 97

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-09-06
Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Incoming Time Information Display
If this option is set to "1", the Incoming Call Time is displayed on the multiline terminals's LCD
while the telephone is ringing.
21-01-03
Trunk Interdigit Time (External)
The system waits for this timer to expire before starting the Call Timer.
Operation
To time your trunk calls:
1.
Place a trunk call.

The timer starts automatically.
2 - 98
Call Duration Timer

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their calls to another extension or an off-premise
number. Call Forwarding ensures that the user's calls are covered when they are away from their work
area. The types of Call Forwarding are:
J
Call Forwarding when Busy or Unanswered
Calls to the extension forward when busy or unanswered.
J
Call Forwarding Immediate
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and only the destination rings.
J
Call Forwarding with both Ringing
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and both the destination and the forwarded
extension ring (not for Voice Mail).
J
Call Forwarding when Unanswered
Calls forward only if they are unanswered (Ring No Answer).
J
Call Forwarding Follow Me
Refer to Call Forwarding with Follow Me on page 2-127 for more information.
J
Personal Answering Machine Emulation
Allows the extension to emulate an answering machine. Refer to "Voice Mail" for more information.
Call Forwarding will reroute calls ringing an extension, including calls transferred from another
extension. Call Forwarding can also be split, allowing internal and external calls to forward to different
destinations. The extension user can enable Call Forwarding from their telephone. An extension user
can also set the forwarding for another extension by using "Call Forward for any Extension to
Destination". To redirect calls while a user is at another telephone, use "Call Forwarding with Follow
Me". A periodic VRS announcement can remind users that their calls are forwarded.
Conditions
Virtual Extensions can be set to Call Forward. PRG 15-02-21 must be set to a 1, allowing
the Virtual Extension to place outgoing calls.
If an extension in a call forward chain has Call Forward with Both Ring or Call Forward with
Follow Me set, calls will not continue routing to other extensions in the chain.
Call Forwarding
2 - 99

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Call Forwards can be chained allowing calls to forward from one extension to the next. Up
to 32 extensions can be linked in a call forward chain.
Periodic reminder message requires a DSP daughter board for Voice Response System
(VRS).
Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from
receiving Department Pilot Calls.
Ring Groups do not follow Call Forward to voice mail.
Call Forward Split does not allow for Call Forward with Follow Me.
If Call Forwarding off premise, a trunk access code must be included in the forwarding
number.
Call Forward with Follow Me allows for a single station to set follow me for multiple stations.
When canceling Call Forward with Follow Me, the use must specify the station to cancel or
cancel all.
The terminal must be in an idle state to enable call forwarding with a Programmable
Function Key, or receiving dial tone to enable call forwarding with a service code.
Call Forward for any Extension to Destination can not be set or canceled from a Virtual
Extension.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override allows for Overriding a Call Forwarding or DND
setting at another extension.
When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension why the call is
ringing to their telephone.
An extension user can forward their calls to a Department number.
A DSS key will indicate a Call Forwarding indication for extensions forwarded with
Immediate Call Forwarding.
Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming. DIL calls
will ring an idle Department Group member, then follow 22-08 programming then 22-05
programming.
Function keys simplify Call Forwarding operation.
Default Setting
Enabled
2 - 100
Call Forwarding

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
System Availability
Terminals
Any Station and Virtual Extensions
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Central Office Calls, Answering
Department Calling
Direct Station Selection
Do Not Disturb
Programmable Function Keys
Voice Response System (VRS)
Call Forwarding
2 - 101

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Programming
Program
Name
Defaults
Number
11-10-06
Setting the Automatic Forwarding for each Trunk Line
733
11-10-07
Canceling the Automatic Forwarding for each Trunk Line
734
11-10-08
Setting the Destination for Automatic Trunk Forwarding
735
11-10-18
Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box
722
11-11-01
Call Forward - Immediate
741
11-11-02
Call Forward - Busy
742
11-11-03
Call Forward - No Answer
743
11-11-04
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer
744
11-11-05
Call Forward - Both Ring
745
11-11-07
Call Forwarding - Follow-Me
746
11-11-08
Do Not Disturb
747
11-11-45
Set or Cancel Call Forwarding Immediate Split
No Setting
11-11-46
Set or Cancel Call Forwarding Busy Split
No Setting
11-11-47
Set or Cancel Call Forwarding No Answer Split
No Setting
11-11-48
Set or Cancel Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer Split
No Setting
11-11-49
Set or Cancel Call Forwarding Both Ring Split
No Setting
11-11-52
Set or Cancel Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination
790
11-11-53
Set or Cancel Call Forward Busy for any Extension to Destination
791
11-11-54
Set or Cancel Call Forward No Answer for any Extension to Destination
792
11-11-55
Set or Cancel Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination
793
11-11-58
Call forward with personal greeting
713
11-12-01
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
707
11-16-06
DND/Call Forward Override
No Setting
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a Function Key for Call Forwarding setup code (code 10~15).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
2 - 102
Call Forwarding

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
20-11-01
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forward Immediate.
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to set Call
Forward Immediate.
20-11-02
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forward Busy
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to set Call
Forwarding when Busy.
20-11-03
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forward No Answer
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to set Call
Forwarding when Unanswered.
20-11-04
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forward Dual Ring
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to set Call
Forwarding with Both Ringing.
20-11-05
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forward Follow Me
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to set Call
Forward with Follow Me.
20-11-23
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - CAR/VE Call Forward Set/Cancel
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to set and cancel Call
Forwarding for a a CAR or Virtual Extension.
24-02-03
System Options for Transfer - Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Set the Delayed Call Forwarding interval. For an unanswered call, Call Forward No Answer
occurs after this interval.
Operation
To set Call Forward Immediate at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only; press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function Keys.
(PRG 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 10)
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.

Refer to Call Forwarding, Off-Premise on page 2-111.

Your Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key flashes.
Call Forwarding
2 - 103

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
To cancel Call Forward Immediate at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only; press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(PRG 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 10)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
To set Call Forward Busy/No Answer at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Service Code (default: 744).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only; press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(PRG 15-07-01, 13 or SC 751, Key Code 13)
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.

Refer to Call Forwarding, Off-Premise on page 2-111.
To cancel Call Forward Busy/No Answer at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Service Code (default: 744).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only; press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(PRG 15-07-01, 13 or SC 751, Key Code 13)
3.
3. Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
2 - 104
Call Forwarding

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
To set Call Forward Both Ring at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Both Ring Service Code (default: 745).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only; press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(PRG 15-07-01, 14 or SC 751, Key Code 14)
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension number.
5.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
To cancel Call Forward Both Ring at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Both Ring Service Code (default: 745).
- OR -
At Multiline Terminal only; press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(PRG 15-07-01, 14 or SC 751 Key Code 14)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
To set Call Forward Follow-Me from the destination station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Follow-Me Service Code (default: 746).
- OR -
At Multiline Terminal only; press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(PRG 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 15)
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the station number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
5.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
Call Forwarding
2 - 105

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
To cancel Call Forward Follow-Me from the destination station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Follow-Me Service Code (default: 746).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only; press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(PRG 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 15)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Dial the station number, which is forwarded, or 0 to cancel all extensions.
5.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
To set Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination Service Code (Default: 790).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
5.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
To cancel Call Forward Immediate for any Extension:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default: 790)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Dial the station number which is forwarded.
5.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
To set Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default:
793).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
5.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
2 - 106
Call Forwarding

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
To cancel Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default:
793).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Dial the station number, which is forwarded.
5.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
To set Call Forward Immediate using a Virtual Extension:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.

Refer to Call Forwarding, Off-Premise on page 2-111.
To cancel Call Forward Immediate at a forwarding station:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel)
4.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
To set Call Forward Busy/No Answer using a Virtual Extension:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Service Code (Default: 744).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.

Refer to Call Forwarding, Off-Premise on page 2-111.
Call Forwarding
2 - 107

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
To cancel Call Forward Busy/No Answer using a Virtual Extension:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Service Code (default: 744).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press the Speaker key or hang up.
2 - 108
Call Forwarding

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Description
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension. This is helpful,
for example, to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Any Station
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Programming
11-12-01
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb Override
Customize the Service Code which is to be used for Call Forwarding/DND Override (default:
707).
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
2 - 109

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
11-16-06
Single Digit Service Code Setup - DND/Call Forward Override
Customize the 1-digit Service Code used for DND/Call Forward Override.
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override (code 37).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-13-04
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Call Forwarding/DND Override
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to initiate Call Forwarding/
DND Override.
Operation
To override an extension's Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb:
1.
Call the forwarded or DND extension.
2.
Press the Override key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 37).
2 - 110
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Description
Off-Premise Call Forwarding allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site location. By
enabling Call Forward, Off-Premise, the user can stay in touch by having the system forward their calls
while they are away from the office. The forwarding destination can be any telephone number the user
enters, such as a mobile phone, home office, hotel or meeting room. Off-Premise Call Forwarding can
route the off-site telephone number over a specific trunk or through a trunk group, Automatic Route
Selection or Trunk Group Routing.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:
J
Ringing intercom calls from co-worker's extensions
J
Calls routed from the VRS or Voice Mail 1
J
Direct Inward Lines 1
J
DISA, DID and tie line calls to the forwarded extension 1
J
Transferred calls 1
Off-Premise Call Forwarding does not reroute Call Arrival (CAR) Keys, Call Arrival (CAR) Keys, or Ring
Group calls (i.e., trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Programs 22-04 and
22-05).
Conditions
Call Forwarding Off-Premise requires either loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or
ground start trunks.
The trunk access code and the outside telephone number combined cannot exceed 24
digits.
Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from
receiving Department Pilot Calls.
If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10 - 17), the DND key
flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.
DID calls to an extension with Off-Premise Call Forwarding set will not recall if there is no
answer.
1.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding can reroute an incoming trunk call only if the outgoing trunk selected has disconnect
supervision enabled (refer to the Programming section).
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 111

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming. DIL calls
will ring an idle Department Group member, then follow 22-08 programming then 22-05
programming.
Door Boxes must be programmed in order for the calls to be transferred off-premise.
The outside number Call Forwarding dials can only be a number normally allowed by the
forwarded extension's Toll Restriction.
In systems with a DSP daughter board for VRS, callers to an extension forwarded
off-premise hear, "Please hold on, your call is being rerouted." This option can be disabled
in PRG 40-10-01 by setting it to disable.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
2 - 112
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Related Features
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Do Not Disturb
Door Box
Call Arrival Keys (CAR)
Code Restriction
Virtual Extensions
Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming
10-09-01
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Allocate the circuits on the CPUII ETUs for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection.
14-01-13 Basic Trunk Data Setup - Loop Supervision Enable (1) loop supervision for each trunk
that should be able to use Call Forwarding Off-Premise.
11-11-01
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Call Forward Immediate
Used to assign the Call Forward All Service Code (default not assigned).
11-11-02
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)- Call Forward Busy
Used to assign the Call Forward Busy Service Code (default not assigned).
11-11-03
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Call Forward - No Answer
Used to assign the Call Forward No Answer Service Code (default not assigned).
11-11-04
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Call Forward - Busy/No Answer
Used to assign the Call Forward Busy No Answer Service Code (default not assigned).
11-11-05
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Call Forward - Both Ring
Used to assign the Call Forward Both Ring Service Code (default not assigned).
11-11-45
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Set or Cancel Call Forwarding All Call
Split
Used to assign the Call Forward All Split Service Code (default not assigned).
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 113

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
11-11-46
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Set or Cancel Call Forwarding Busy
Split
Used to assign the Call Forward Busy Split Service Code (default not assigned).
11-11-47
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Set or Cancel Call Forwarding No
Answer Split
Used to assign the Call Forward No Answer Split Service Code (default not assigned).
11-11-48
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Set or Cancel Call Forwarding Busy/No
Answer Split
Used to assign the Call Forward Busy No Answer Split Service Code (default not assigned).
11-11-49
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Set or Cancel Call Forwarding Both
Ring Split
Used to assign the Call Forward Both Ring Split Service Code (default not assigned).
11-11-52
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Set or Cancel Call Forward All Call at
Destination Station [No Split]
Used to assign the Call Forward All for any Extension Service Code (default not assigned).
11-11-53
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Set or Cancel Call Forward Busy at
Destination Station [No Split]
Used to assign the Call Forward Busy for any Extension Service Code (default not assigned).
11-11-54
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Set or Cancel Call Forward No Answer
at Destination Station [No Split]
Used to assign the Call Forward No Answer for any Extension Service Code (default not
assigned).
11-11-55
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Set or Cancel Call Forward Busy/No
Answer at Destination Station [No Split]
Used to assign the Call Forward Busy No Answer for any Extension Service Code (default not
assigned).
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-11-12
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding Off-Premise
In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) setting up Call Forwarding Off-
Premise at the extension.
24-02-07
System Options for Transfer - Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone
This timer will start when a trunk begins talking with another trunk (for example: trunk-to-trunk
transfer, outgoing from trunk, Tandem Trunking) (0~64800, default: 1800).
2 - 114
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
25-07-07
System Timers for VRS/DISA - DISA/Tandem Trunking Long Conversation Warning Tone
Time
Determine the length of time a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard (0-64800 seconds).
25-07-08
System Timers for VRS/DISA - DISA/Tandem Trunking Long Conversation Disconnect
This timer determines how long the system will wait before disconnecting a DISA or any
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking) call after the Long Conversation tone is heard
(0~64800 seconds).
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding - Normal (0) Trunks (in addition to above programming)
11-10-06
Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Setting the Automatic Trunk Forwarding
Customize the service code to be used to set the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature (default:
733).
11-10-07
Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Cancel the Automatic Trunk Forwarding
Customize the service code to be used to cancel the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature
(default: 734).
11-10-08
Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Automatic Trunk Forwarding Destination
Customize the service code to be used to set the destination for the Automatic Trunk Forwarding
feature (default: 735).
13-01-01
Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup - Abbreviated Dialing Auto Outgoing Call Mode
Determine if dialing an Abbreviated Dialing number will dial an outside number (seizing a trunk
as assigned in Program 13-05) or an Intercom number (0 = Trunk Dialing Mode, 1 = Extension
Dialing Mode).
13-04-01
Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name
Enter the Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers and names which are to be used for
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding.
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-07-05
Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service
codes.
22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup - Incoming Type
Used to assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk. There is one item for each Mode. When
using Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding the trunks must be set for Normal (0).
24-04-01 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup
Assign the Abbreviated Dialing number bin (0~1999) to a trunk and the time mode which should
be used as the destination of the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding.
Trunks: 001~200
Time Modes: 1~8
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 115

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding - DID (3) Trunk Forwarding by Department Groups (in addition to above
programming)
Refer to Department Calling for additional Department Group programming.
11-07-01 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Assign pilot numbers to the Extension (Department) Groups you set up in Program 16-02.
11-11-25
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Setting the Automatic Trunk Forwarding
for Department Groups
Customize the service code to be used to set the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature for a
Department Group (default: 602).
11-11-26
Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Cancel the Automatic Trunk Forwarding
for Department Groups
Customize the service code to be used to cancel the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature for a
Department Group (default: 603).
11-11-27
Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Automatic Trunk Forwarding Destination
for Department Groups
Customize the service code to be used to set the destination for the Automatic Trunk Forwarding
feature for a Department Group (default: 604).
13-01-01
Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup - Abbreviated Dialing Auto Outgoing Call Mode
Determine if dialing an Abbreviated Dialing number will dial an outside number (seizing a trunk
as assigned in Program 13-05) or an Intercom number (0 = Trunk Dialing Mode, 1 = Extension
Dialing Mode).
13-04-01
Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name
Enter the Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers and names which are to be used for
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding.
14-01-04
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls
CODEC gain set at 0 dB [14-01-04 = 32 (CODEC Gain Type 2)] can be used to set the transmit
CODEC gain type for multiline Conference or transferred calls.
14-01-05
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls
CODEC gain set at 0 dB [14-01-04 = 32 (CODEC Gain Type 2)] can be used to set the transmit
CODEC gain type for multiline Conference or transferred calls.
14-06
Trunk Group Routing
Set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups you assign in Program 14-05. When users
dial 9, the system routes their calls in the order (priority) you specify.
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign an Automatic Forwarding at Department Group key (58) or a Delayed Forwarding at
Department Group key (59) for an extension user.
16-02-01
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Assign extensions to Department Groups (1~64) and set the priority assignment.
2 - 116
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-11-17
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Department Group Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension within a Department Group's ability to use the Trunk-to-
Trunk Forwarding service codes.
24-05-01
Department Group Transfer Target Setup
Assign the Abbreviated Dialing number bin (0~1999) which should be used as the destination of
the Department Group's Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding.
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding - DID (3) Trunk Forwarding Using DID Translation Table (in addition to
above programming)
Refer to Direct Inward Dialing (DID) for additional DID programming.
22-11-05
DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Transfer Destination 1
22-11-06
DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Transfer Destination 2
For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the first and second Transfer
Destinations if the callers receives a busy or no answer (action defined in 22-11-04).
Destination Options:
0 = No Setting
1~100 = Incoming Group
102 = In-Skin/External Voice Mail
103 = Centralized Voice Mail
01~264 = Department Group
400 = DID
401 = DISA
1000~1999 = Abbreviated Number (000~999)
If the Transfer Destinations are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the final
transfer destination (Program 22-10).
Operation
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise non-split:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Call Forwarding Service Code. (Refer to Table 3-2 Service Codes by Number or Table 3-3
Service Codes by Feature.)
- OR -
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 117

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
At a multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys (PRG
15-07-01, 10 ~15 or SC 751 Key Code 10~15).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the Trunk Access Code (default: 9) + Number (9+2142622000).

Trunk access codes are 9 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 704 + Line Group (1~9, 01~99 or 001~100) or #9 + Line
number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5).

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise non-split:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2. Dial the Call Forward Access Code (default not assigned).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise Split:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2. Dial the Call Forwarding Service Code.
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial 1 (Internal) or 0 ( External).
5.
Dial Trunk Access Code (default: 9) + number (9 + 2142622000).

Trunk access codes are 9 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 704 + Line Group (1~9, 01~99 or 001~100) or #9 + Line
number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5).

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise Split:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
2.
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
3. Dial the Call Forward Access Code (default not assigned).
2 - 118
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
4.
Dial 0 (Cancel).

If Internal and External are set both will be canceled.

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding for Door Boxes"
These operations are performed at the Door Box Ringing Extension only.
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:
This option only works for ISDN PRI or BRI Trunks.
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Speaker key + Dial SC 722.
- OR -
At multiline terminal only, press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751, code 54).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset + Dial 722.
2.
Dial the Door Box number (1~4).
3.
Dial the Abbreviated Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded.
4.
Press the Speaker key (or hang up at the single line telephone) to hang up.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:
1.
At the Multiline Terminal, press the Speaker Key + Dial SC 722.
- OR -
At a multiline terminal only, press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751, code 54).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset + Dial 722.
2.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
Method 1
Set the Destination and Forward the Line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 735.
3.
Dial trunk port number (001~200) to be defined.
4.
Select the time mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Enter the telephone number, which is the destination of the forwarded trunk.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 119

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II

The number will be stored in the Abbreviated Dial bin number assigned in Program 24-04-01. This entry will
overwrite any existing number defined in the bin.
6.
Press Hold to accept the entry.
7.
Repeat from Step 3 to define another time mode entry or press Speaker to hang up.
Cancel the Line Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 735.
3.
Dial trunk port number (7 001~200) to be defined.
4.
Select the time mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Press the Exit key.
6.
Press the Speaker key to hang up.
Method 2 (follows the pre-defined destination in Program 24-04-01)
Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
The Abbreviated Dial bin must be defined in 13-04-01 in order for the line to forward.
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 733.
3.
Dial trunk port number to be used (001~200).
4.
Press the Speaker key to hang up.
Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 734.
3.
Dial trunk port number to be used (001~200).
4.
Press the Speaker key to hang up.
Department Group Line Forwarding
Method 1
Set the Destination and Forward the Line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 604.
2 - 120
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Select the time mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Enter the telephone number, which is the destination of the forwarded trunk.

The number will be stored in the Abbreviated Dial bin number assigned in Program 24-04-01. This entry will
overwrite any existing number defined in the bin.
6.
Press Hold to accept the entry.
7.
Repeat from Step 3 to define another time mode entry or press Speaker to hang up.
Cancel the Line Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 604.
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Select the time mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Press the Exit key.
6.
Press the Speaker key to hang up.
Method 2 (follows the pre-defined destination in Program 24-05-01)
Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
The Abbreviated Dial bin must be defined in 13-04-01 in order for the line to forward.
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 602.
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 603.
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Press the Speaker key to hang up.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 121

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 122
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Call Forwarding - Park and Page
Description
When an extension user is away from their phone, Park and Page can let them know when they have a
call waiting to be answered. The Personal Greeting and Park & Page options can have up to 200
messages total (note that the Park & Page feature uses 2 messages). To enable Park and Page, the
user records a Personal Greeting along with an additional Paging announcement. Park and Page will
then answer an incoming call and play the Personal Greeting to the caller. The caller then listens to
Music on Hold (if available) while the system broadcasts the prerecorded Paging announcement. When
the extension user hears the Page, they can go to any telephone and use Directed Call Pickup to
intercept the call.
For example, John Smith could record a Personal Greeting that says:
"Hello, this is John Smith. I am away from my phone right now but please hold on while I am
automatically paged."
The prerecorded Paging announcement could say:
"John Smith, you have a call waiting on your line."
The incoming caller hears the first message and listens to Music on Hold while the system broadcasts
the second message. John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call. If John doesn't pick
up the call, the Page periodically repeats.
Park and Page follows the rules for Personal Greeting for All Calls, immediately rerouted. This means
that Park and Page will activate for ringing Intercom calls, DID calls and DISA calls. It will also activate
for calls transferred from the Automated Attendant. Additionally, calls from the Automated Attendant
follow Automatic Overflow routing if not picked up. Park and Page will activate for transferred outside
calls but not play the Personal Greeting to the caller. If a call comes in when the specified Page zone is
busy, the system broadcasts the announcement when the zone becomes free.
Conditions
Park and Page announcements will only repeat once.
Voice Announcement (VAU) recording time is fixed at 2 minutes and cannot be changed.
Call Forwarding - Park and Page
2 - 123

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default Setting
Park and Page is available at default for internal paging access code 701, zone 1.
Use access code of 713. See feature Operation. Set MB40-10-01 for VRS guidance
message.
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
Voice Response System (VRS) card and DSPII-U10 Unit
Related Features
Analog Communication Interface (ACI)
Music on Hold
Programming
11-11-58
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) Call Forward with Personal Greeting
Call forward with Personal greeting VRS. Service code setup. Default set to 713.
11-12-19
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) Internal Group Paging
Service code setup. Default set to 701.
11-12-20
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) External Paging
External paging access code. Service code setup. Default set to 703.
11-12-24
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) Combined Paging
Combined paging, internal / external access code. Service code setup. Default set to ,1.
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
2 - 124
Call Forwarding - Park and Page

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
31-02-01
Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Paging Group Number
Assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones).
31-03-01
Internal Paging Group Settings
Assign names to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system shows the names you
program on the telephone displays.
31-04-01
External Paging Zone Group
Assign each External Paging Speaker to an External Paging Zone.
31-06-01
External Speaker Control Broadcast Splash Tone Before Paging
Use this option to enabled or disable splash tone before Paging over an external zone. If
enabled, the system broadcasts a splash tone before the External Paging announcement.
The paging chime will override the first four seconds of the announcement. Allow a delay in announcement
recording for chime time.
31-06-02
External Speaker Control Broadcast Splash Tone After Paging
Use this option to enabled or disable splash tone after Paging over an external zone. If enabled,
the system broadcasts a splash tone at the end of an External Paging announcement.
40-10-01
Voice Announcement Service Option VRS Fixed Message
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system's ability to play the fixed VRS messages (such as "You have
a message.").
40-10-05
Voice Announcement Service Option Park and Page Repeat Timer
If a Park and Page is not picked up within this interval, the Paging announcement repeats.
Operation
To have the system page you when you have a call:
1.
Press the Speaker key (or lift the handset at the single line telephone) and dial 713.
2.
When you hear, "Please start recording," record you Personal Greeting.

If you already have Park and Page or Personal Greeting set up, you can dial:
3 to erase (the optionally HOLD to cancel the erase)
5 to listen (then # again to listen again)
7 to re-record
3.
Dial #7.
4.
When you hear, "Please start recording," record your page and dial # when the announcement is
complete.

A paging chime will override the first four seconds of an announcement. Allow a delay in announcement
recording for chime time.
Call Forwarding - Park and Page
2 - 125

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
5.
Dial the Page Zone that should broadcast your announcement.
For example, for Internal Zone 1 dial 701 + 1, or for Combined Paging Zone, 1 dial ,1 + 1.
6.
Dial the Park and Page type:
2 = All Calls
3 = Outside Calls Only
7.
Press the Speaker key to hang up (or go on-hook at the single line telephone).
To pick up your Park and Page:
1.
Press the Speaker key (or lift the handset at the single line telephone).
2.
Dial + your extension number.
To cancel your Park and Page:
1.
Press the Speaker key (or lift the handset at the single line telephone).
2.
Dial 713 + 3.
3.
Press the Speaker key to hang up (or go on-hook at the single line telephone).
2 - 126
Call Forwarding - Park and Page

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Description
While at a co-worker's desk, a user can have Call Forwarding with Follow Me redirect their calls to the
co-worker's extension. This helps an employee who gets detained at a co-worker's desk longer than
expected. To prevent losing important calls, the employee can activate Call Forwarding with Follow Me
from the co-worker's telephone.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension. To reroute calls from the
initiating (forwarding) extension, use Call Forwarding.
Conditions
Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from
receiving Department Pilot Calls.
If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10~17), the DND key
flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.
Multiple Stations can set Call Forward Follow Me to one station.
Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming. DIL calls
will ring an idle Department Group member, then follow 22-08 programming then 22-05
programming.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
2 - 127

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Do Not Disturb
Programmable Function Keys
Programming
11-11-07
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Call Forwarding - Follow-Me
Assign the service code of Call Forward Follow Me (Default Not Set).
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for one-touch access to the Call Forwarding (Station) setup code (code
10~17).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-11-01
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding with Follow Me
In an extension's Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) the setting of Call Forwarding with
Follow Me.
Operation
To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a multiline terminal:
1.
At a multiline terminal, other than your own, press the Speaker Key and dial Service Code (746,
PRG 11-11-07).
- OR -
Press the Call Forward Follow Me key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: Code 15).
2.
Dial 1 to set.
3.
Dial the Extension to Follow.

The multiline terminal with display will indicate on the display of the telephone which Call Forward Follow Me
is set to. Also, the Programmed Follow Me Flexible Line Key will flash (if assigned) when Follow Me is set.
To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own Multiline Terminal:
1.
At your multiline terminal, press the Speaker key and dial Service Code (746, PRG 11-11-07).
- OR -
Press the Call Forward Follow Me key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: Code 15).
2 - 128
Call Forwarding with Follow Me

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
2.
Dial 0 to cancel.
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel All Forward Follow Me).
- OR -
Dial the extension number with Follow Me set.
To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a single line telephone:
1.
At a single line telephone, other than your own, lift the handset and dial the Service Code (746
PRG 11-11-07).
2.
Dial 1 to set.
3.
Dial the extension to follow.
To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own single line telephone:
1.
At your single line telephone, lift the handset and dial Service Code (746, PRG 11-11-07).
2.
Dial 0 to cancel.
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel All Forward Follow Me).
- OR -
Dial the extension number with Follow Me set.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
2 - 129

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 130
Call Forwarding with Follow Me

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Call Monitoring
Description
Call Monitoring allows selected Multiline Terminal Users to monitor another user's conversation without
the ability to participate. A programmable audible alert tone can be sent to that station user. Without the
audible alert (silent monitor), no indication is provided to either the monitored station or the outside party.
Caution
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor,
retrieve, or record telephone conversation or other sound activities, whether
or not contemporaneous with transmission, may be illegal in certain
circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought
prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone
conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification
to all parties to a telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other
notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone
conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the telephone conversation.
Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Conditions
Call Monitoring is allowed for internal calls.
An extension user cannot Monitor an Intercom call if one of the Intercom callers is using
Hands-free Answerback. Both Intercom parties must have lifted the handset or pressed
Speaker.
An extension user cannot monitor a conference, however an extension programmed for
Call Monitor can barge In to a conference.
With Program 20-13-10 set to 0, a call, which has been barged into, can be placed on hold
by the originator of the outside call. Both the outside caller and the extension, which is
monitoring the call, are placed on hold.
The handset and microphone are muted during Call Monitoring.
Live Record will not work for Call Monitor calls.
With Program 20-13-10 set to 1, a call which is being Monitored can be placed on park by
the originator of the outside call, but only the outside caller is placed in park. The extension
which is monitoring the call is dropped.
Call Monitoring
2 - 131

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default Setting
Disabled.
System Availability
Terminals
All terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Intercom
Barge-In
Conference
Hold
Park
Privacy (Data)
Programmable Function Keys
Voice Mail
Programming
11-12-08
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Barge-In
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to use the Barge-In feature
(default = 710).
2 - 132
Call Monitoring

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
11-16-02
One-Digit Service Code Setup - Barge-In
Use this option to set up Item 02 for single digit Barge-In. For example, you can assign Item 02
to use digit 5 for Barge-In. This would allow you to program a function key with an extension
number plus the Barge-In code (i.e., 305 5). This allows one-touch access to the Barge-In
feature for extension 305. If you un-define a service code, be careful when you change this item
that you don't inadvertently disable any essential dialing function (such as Voice Mail or
Message Waiting).
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Barge-In (code 34).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
20-13-10
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge-In Mode
In an extension's Class of Service, enable the Barge-In Speech Mode (0) or Monitor Mode (1) at
the initiating extension (i.e., Barge-In initiator).
20-13-15
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge-In, Initiate
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Barge-In at the initiating extension
(i.e., Barge-In initiator).
20-13-16
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge-In, Receive
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Barge-In at the receiving extension
(i.e., Barge-In receive).
20-13-17
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge-In Tone/Display
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Barge-In Tone. If disabled, this also turns off the Barge-In display at
the called extension.
20-13-32
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Multiple Barge-In
Enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to have multiple user's Barge-In to their
conversation.
20-14-11
Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M - DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In
Use this option to enabled (1) or disable (0) a DISA or tie trunk user from using the Barge-In
feature with the service code un-defined in Program 11-12-08.
20-18-07
Service Tone Timer - Intrusion Tone Repeat Time
After a user Barges In, the system repeats the Barge-In tone after this interval. Normally, you
should disable this timer by entering 0. (This timer also affect any other types of call interruption
features, such as Voice Mail Conversation Recording, Voice Over, etc.)
21-01-03
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Trunk Interdigit Time (External)
Program how long an extension must wait before using the Barge-In feature can be used on a
call (this timer waits until this timer expires before putting a call in a talk state). This timer also
affects Voice Over.
Call Monitoring
2 - 133

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Operation
The call must be set up for about 10 seconds before it can be Monitored. Listen for busy/ring or busy
tone.
To Call Monitor after calling a busy extension:
1.
Call a busy extension.
2.
Press the Barge-In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 34).
- OR -
The following steps are not available for DISA or tie line trunks.
1.
Dial the extension number of the busy internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710 (the access code will change)
To Call Monitor without Fist calling the busy extension:
1.
Press the Speaker key or lift handset.
2.
Dial 710 or press the Barge-In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 34) (the access code will change).
3.
Dial a busy extension.

If Monitoring is not possible:
Q
the extension user will hear a warning tone.
Q
the DISA user will be rerouted to the defined ring group.
Q
the tie line user will hear a busy tone.
2 - 134
Call Monitoring

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Call Redirect
Description
Call Redirect allows a multiline terminal user to transfer a call to a pre-defined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call. This can be useful if you are on a
call and another rings in to your extension. By pressing the Call Redirect key, the call is transferred,
allowing you to continue with your current call.
This feature works with the following types of calls:
J
Normal trunk call
J
DID
J
DISA
J
DIL
J
E&M
J
ICM
The following types of calls cannot be redirected with the feature:
J
ACD
J
Transferred
J
Department Group (all ring mode)
J
Door Box
J
Virtual Extension
Conditions
After pressing the Call Redirect key, the call will not recall to the extension.
The pre-defined destination has to be an extension number or voice mail pilot number.
Default Setting
Enabled
Call Redirect
2 - 135

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
System Availability
Terminals
Any Multiline Terminal
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
Programming
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key for Call Redirect (code 49 + destination extension number).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-11-16
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Redirect
Enable (1) or disable (0) a multiline terminal user's ability to transfer a call to a pre-defined
destination (such as an operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call.
Operation
To redirect a ringing call:
1.
With an incoming call ringing your extension, press the Call Redirect key (Program 15-07 or SC
751: 49 + Destination Extension Number) without lifting the handset.
2 - 136
Call Redirect

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Call Waiting / Camp-On
Description
With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) without
hanging up. When the user Camps-On, the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicating
the waiting call. The call goes through when the busy extension becomes free. Call Waiting helps busy
extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in queue for a
busy extension without being forgotten.
Conditions
Call Arrival (CAR) Key (virtual extension) keys do not support Call Waiting/Camp-On
Programmable Function keys (code 35).
If an extension user Camps-On and then hangs up, the system converts the camp-on to a
callback.
If an extension busy on a call has off-hook Signaling, an incoming Intercom calls rings the
idle second line appearance.
Off-Hook Signaling gives an extension the ability to block a caller from dialing 704 to
Camp-On and/or DID callers from automatically camping on.
Function keys simplify Call Waiting/Camp-On operation.
An extension user may be able to Transfer a call to a busy extension.
Trunk Queuing lets an extension user camp-on to a trunk.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
Multiline Terminal, Single Line Telephone, Virtual Extensions
Call Waiting / Camp-On
2 - 137

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Callback
Dual Line Appearance/Off-Hook Signaling
Off-Hook Signaling
Programmable Function Keys
Transfer
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Programming
11-12-04
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Set Camp-On
Customize the Service Code, which is to be used for setting Camp-On (default: 750).
11-12-05
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Cancel Camp-On
Customize the Service Code, which is to be used for cancelling Camp-On (default: 770).
11-12-47
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Call Waiting Answer / Split Answer for SLT
If required, use this program to change the code users dial to Split while on a call. This code is
normally 794.
11-16-05
Single Digit Service Code Setup - Camp-On
Customize the1-digit Service Code used for setting Camp-On (default: #).
11-11-23
Second Call for DID/ DISA/ DIL/ E&M
This service code enables Second Call to each extension when PRG 20-09-01 (Second Call) is
set to 0 (disable).
679 = Default Service Code
2 - 138
Call Waiting / Camp-On

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
15-02-06
Hold Key Operation Mode
Sets the function of the extension's Hold key.
0 = Normal Hold (default)
1 = Exclusive Hold
2 = Park Hold
15-02-12
Off-Hook Signaling Type
For each extension, set the Off-Hook Ringing type.
0 = Muted (default)
1 = None
3 = Beep in Speaker
4 = Beep in Handset
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Camp-On (code 35). This key is also the Callback key.
20-01-08
System Options - Trunk Queuing Callback Time
Set the Trunk Queuing callback time (default: 15). A Trunk Queuing Callback will ring an
extension for this interval.
20-01-09
System Options - Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
The system cancels an extension's Callback or Trunk Queueing request after this interval
(default: 64800 seconds).
20-03-01
System Options for Single Line Telephones
The system cancels an extension's Callback or Trunk Queueing request after this interval
(default: 64800 seconds).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service to an extension (1~15).
20-09-01
Second Call for DUD/ DISA/ DDI/ DIL/ E&M
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to receive a second call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or
Tie line caller.
20-09-07
Call Queuing
Set to Enable (1) or Disable (0).
20-13-05
Intercom Off-Hook signaling
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to receive
Off-Hook Signaling.
20-13-06
Automatic Override (for KST) / Call Waiting (for SLT)
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to receive a second call from intercom caller.
Call Waiting / Camp-On
2 - 139

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
20-13-35
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Block Camp-On
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to block callers from dialing 2 to
camp on.
20-18-06
Service Tone Timer - Call Waiting Tone Timer
Use this option to set the interval between call waiting tones. This timer also sets the interval
between off-hook signaling alerts.
Operation
To Camp-On to a busy extension:
1.
Call the busy extension.
2.
Dial # or press the Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
3.
Do not hang up.

To camp on to a trunk, refer to Trunk Queuing/Camp-On on page 2-859.
To cancel a Camp-On request:
1.
Hang up.
2.
At a multiline terminal, press the Speaker key and dial 770.
- OR -
At a multiline terminal, press the Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset and dial 770.
To Split (answer a waiting call) at a single line telephone:
Listen for Camp-On beep.
1.
1. Hookflash or hookflash and dial 794 to repeatedly split between the two calls.
To Split (answer a waiting call) at a single line telephone:
Listen for Camp-On beep.
1.
Hookflash and dial 794 to repeatedly split between the two calls.

The operation depends on the setting in PRG 11-12-47.

This operation is valid only before the caller performs the camp-on operation (refer `To Camp-0n a busy
extension - step 2).
2 - 140
Call Waiting / Camp-On

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Callback
Description
When an extension user calls a co-worker that does not answer or is busy, they can leave a Callback
request for a return call. The user does not have to repeatedly call the unanswered extension back,
hoping to find it idle.
The system processes Callback requests as follows:
1.
Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B.

Caller can place or answer additional calls in the mean time.
2.
When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring.
3.
Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy or unanswered)
extension B.

If caller A does not answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Callback.
4.
As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B.
Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring. When
Callback Automatic Answer is enabled, a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset.
When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled, the user must press the ringing line appearance to
answer the Callback ring.
Conditions
An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time.
Call Arrival (CAR) Key (virtual extension) keys do not support Call Waiting/Camp-On
Programmable Function keys (code 35).
If an extension user initiates a Callback but does not hang up, their extension Camps-On to
the busy extension.
Function Keys simplify Callback operation.
Default Setting
Enabled
Callback
2 - 141

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Waiting/Camp-On)
Programmable Function Keys
Programming
11-12-05
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) Cancel Camp On
If required, redefine the service code used cancel Camp On (default: 770).
11-12-44
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) SLT Callback Test
If required, redefine the service code used for SLT Callback Test (default: 799).
11-16-05
One Digit Service Code Setup - Camp On
If required, redefine the service code used to set Camp On (default: #).
15-02-11
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup - Callback Automatic Answer
Enable (1) or disable (0) Callback Automatic Answer.
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Callback (code 35). This key is also the Camp-On key.
20-01-07
System Options - Callback Ring Duration Time
Set the duration of the Callback ring (0~64800 seconds).
20-01-09
System Options - Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
The system cancels Callback and Trunk Queuing requests after this interval (0~64800 seconds).
2 - 142
Callback

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Operation
To place a Callback:
1.
Call unavailable (busy or unanswered) extension.
2.
Dial # or press the Callback key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
3.
Hang up.
4.
Lift the handset when busy extension calls you back.

If the unavailable extension was unanswered (not busy), the Callback goes through after your co-worker uses
their telephone for the first time.

If you have Callback Automatic Answer, you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension when you
lift the handset. If you do not have Callback Automatic Answer, you must press the ringing line appearance to
place the call.
To cancel a Callback:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Speaker key and Dial 770.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal, press Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset and dial 770.
To test Callback at your single line telephone:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 799.
3.
Hang up.
4.
When the telephone rings, lift the handset.

You hear the Hold tone.
5.
Hang up.
Callback
2 - 143

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 144
Callback

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Caller ID
Description
Caller ID allows a display terminal to show an incoming caller's telephone number (called the Directory
Number or DN) and optional name. The Caller ID information is available as pre-answer display. With
the pre-answer display, the user previews the caller's number before picking up the ringing line.
On the CPUII for Caller ID (also used for DTMF receivers and Call Progress Tone Detection) there are 32
resources available. The DSPDB provides an additional 32 resources.
Second Call Display
While busy on a call, the telephone display can show the identity of an incoming trunk or Intercom call.
For incoming trunk calls, the display will show the Caller ID or ANI data or the trunk's name if Caller ID or
ANI are not installed. (Refer to T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) on page 2-803 for more
information on ANI compatibility.) For incoming Intercom calls, the display will show the calling
extension's name.
Caller ID supports the Telco's Called Number Identification (CNI) and Called Number Delivery (CND)
service, when available. These services provide the Caller ID information (i.e., messages) between the
first and second ring burst of an incoming call. There are two types of Caller ID message formats
currently available: Single Message Format and Multiple Message Format. With Single Message
Format, the Telco sends only the caller's telephone number (DN). The DN is either 7 or 10 digits long. In
Multiple Message Format, the Telco sends the DN and the caller's name. The DN for this format is also 7
or 10 digits long, and the name provided consists of up to 15 ASCII characters.
The telephone display can show up to 12 Caller ID digits (for non-ACD calls).
Once installed and programmed, Caller ID is enabled for all types of trunk calls, including:
J
Ring Group calls
J
Calls transferred from another extension
J
Calls transferred from the VRS
J
Calls transferred from Voice Mail (unscreened)
J
Direct Inward Lines (DILs)
Caller ID temporarily stores 50 calls (total of abandoned and answered/unanswered). New calls replace
old calls when the buffer fills.
Caller ID
2 - 145

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Temporary Memory
An unanswered call will cause the Call History key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 08) to flash, indicating a new
call has been placed in the temporary memory. If enabled in programming, the telephone's display will
show "CHECK LIST".
This Caller ID data from the temporary memory can be saved in either Abbreviated Dial bins or in
One-Touch keys making them available for placing future calls.
Outputting Caller ID Data
The system includes the Caller ID data on the SMDR report. The report provides the incoming call's DN
in the DIALED NUMBER field. The CLASS field shows PIN (just like all other incoming calls).
Caller ID data can also output to a PC or other type of computer through a CTA Module. This allows for
off-line database lookups. In a customer service department, for example, the computer could search for
a caller's records and display their account status even before a customer service representative picked
up the telephone.
Caller ID Digits to Voice Mail
A Caller ID/ANI trunk can send Remote Log-On Protocol with Caller ID digits to the voice mail. When a
trunk `001' receives the Caller ID as `12345', the protocol becomes `,,,60001,12345,'.
Display Reason for No Caller ID Information
With Caller ID enabled, the system will provide information for analog calls that do not detect the Caller
ID information. If the Caller ID information is restricted, the telephone display will show "PRIVATE". If the
system is not able to provide Caller ID information because Telco information is not detected, then the
display will show "NO CALLER INFO".
Calling Party Number Information
When using the Electra Elite IPK II Wireless telephone, the system can provide the Caller ID information
for an external call if it is provided by the Telco.
Option to Enable Caller ID Name for SLT
System programming provides an option for single line telephones to display Caller ID.
Add Trunk Access Code to Caller ID with Electra Elite IPK II Wireless Phones
Electra Elite IPK II Wireless (DECT) telephones on the Electra Elite IPK II can hold incoming call history.
This history is created based on the Caller ID information element contained in the call's Setup message
which is transmitted from the Electra Elite IPK II. This information allows users to return calls dialing the
number stored.
2 - 146
Caller ID

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
The stored number, however, does not contain the trunk access code. Without this code, the system
may not be able to seize an outside line to complete the call.
With this feature, when an Electra Elite IPK II Wireless user receives an incoming trunk call, the trunk
access code defined in programming can be added to the Caller ID. This will allow the system to seize
an outside line and then dial the stored number.
J
This function is only applied to incoming analog trunks. It does not apply to incoming extension
calls.
J
Caller ID must be available for this feature to work.
J
Caller ID Edit Mode (Program 20-19-03) must be enabled.
J
The maximum number of Caller ID digit is 20. If the total number of digits (trunk access code
(Program 10-02-05) and Caller ID) is over 20, the remaining Caller ID digits are not dialed.
For example:
Trunk Access Code (Program 10-02-05): 123456# (8 digits)
Incoming Caller ID: 12345678901234567890 (20 digits)
Electra Elite IPK II Wireless Dials: 123456#123456789012
Caller ID Sender Queuing Added
The Electra Elite IPK II system can provide Caller ID (calling party number) to a single line telephone
which has a display.
The system can queue incoming calls to the single line telephone if the system Caller ID sender
resources are busy. Refer to Program 20-19-05 in the Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual.
If the single line telephone user lifts their handset while an incoming call is waiting in queue, they will
hear silence (no dial tone) and can not dial out. When the single line telephone user goes back on hook,
the system immediately sends the queued call to the single line telephone without Caller ID.
Option Available for FSK or DTMF Type for Single LIne Telephone
An option (Program 15-03-11) is available for the Caller ID which allows you to select either FSK or
DTMF as the Caller ID type to be received by a single line telephone.
Option Available for FSK or DTMF Type from Analog Trunk
An option (Program 14-02-16) is available for the Caller ID which allows you to select the type of Caller
ID signal from an analog trunk - FSK or DTMF.
Caller ID
2 - 147

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Name and Number Limited Display with DSTU ETU
The Caller ID feature has been enhanced to provide better functionality with the Dterm Series i
telephones when using a DSTU ETU.
Previously with the Dterm Series i telephones, the Caller ID name was limited to the 10 left most
characters and the Caller ID number was limited to nine digits as both were included on the second line
of the display.
Example:
L i n e
0 0 1
N E C - I n f r o n
2 0 3 9 2 6 5 4 -
Conditions
To have pre-answer Caller ID from the voice mail, the call must be an unscreened transfer.
Caller ID is provided by the CPUII. The DSP daughter board, which plugs onto the CPUII,
can provide additional resources for Caller ID if needed.
Caller ID Name can display up to 12 characters.
Caller ID Number can display up to 11 characters.
A Caller ID Number with more than 12 digits follows PRG 20-19-01 (first 10 or the last 10
digits).
Caller ID information can be stored in Abbreviated Dialing or One-Touch bins.
Caller ID can be displayed for incoming calls as well as transferred calls.
ARS can block outgoing Caller ID information on a call-by-call basis. To do this, insert the
Caller ID block code (e.g., .67) in the ARS Dial Treatments.
Trunks with Privacy Release enabled display Caller ID until the call is answered. To view it
after the call has been picked up, press the line key, which sets the call to private mode. To
keep the call on Privacy Release, press the Help + Exit keys.
An extension user can display the Caller ID information for a call in Park if Automatic
Handsfree in PGM 15-02-08 is set to "0" (Pre-select).
Caller ID information outputs on the SMDR report.
ANI/DNIS can use the Caller ID tables for routing. Refer to T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS
Compatibility) on page 2-803 for more information.
The system can send Caller ID digits to the voice mail if allowed in PGM 14-02-10.
When there are more than 20 characters set in Program 20-20 : Message Setup for
Non-Caller ID Data, either the first or last character(s) will be missing (based on the entry in
Program 20-19-01).
2 - 148
Caller ID

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
If Program 20-09-06 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service ) : Incoming Time
Information Display is set to "1" (Call Time Displayed), the first line will display the time and
date.
When you shut down the system, incoming history data is cleared. But you can back up the
history data by pressing Speaker + #9.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with a display and Single Line Telephones equipped to receive Caller ID
Required Component(s)
COIB(4)-U( ) ETU (in COID mode)
COIB(8)-U( ) ETU (in COID mode)
BRT(4)-U(20) ETU with Firmware 3.00 or higher
DTI -U40 ETU with Firmware 5.0 or higher
SLIB/E -U( ) (in COID mode)
Caller ID
2 - 149

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
One-Touch Calling
Electra Elite IPK II Wireless
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Conference, Voice Call
Privacy Release
Cordless II/Cordless Lite II Telephones
Call Arrival Keys (CAR)
Park
Station Message Detail Recording
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Voice Mail
Programming
10-02-05
Location Setup - Trunk Access Code
For Electra Elite IPK II Wireless users, enter the trunk access code digits required to place an
outgoing call (8 digits maximum: 0~9, , #). This is the code that will be added to the Caller ID
information for incoming trunk calls to allow the call to dial out if allowed in 20-19-03.
-- IMPORTANT --
Program 10-02-05 is only supported by telephone programming. PCPro and WebPro cannot edit
this option.
10-09-01
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Allocate the circuits (1~16 or 1~64) on the CPUII ETU for either DTMF receiving or dial tone
detection (0 = Common Use, 1 = Extension Only, 2 = Trunk Only).
11-15-03
Backup Data Save Service Code
This service code is used for back up the programmed data on the SRAM and Call History to the
Flash ROM. While saving the database, it may cause system lock up.
2 - 150
Caller ID

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
14-01-20
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Block Outgoing Caller ID
Allow (1) or prevent (0) the system from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information
when a user places a call. If allowed (i.e., block enabled), the system automatically inserts the
Caller ID block code 67 (defined in Program 14-01-21) before the user dialed digits (this
requires Program 14-02-10 to be enabled). If prevented (i.e., block disabled), the system
outdials the call just as it was dialed by the user.
Trunks: 1~200
14-01-21
Caller ID Block Code
Enter the code, up to eight digits, that should be used as the Caller ID Block Code. This code is
automatically inserted before dialed digits if Program 14-01-20 is set to `1'.
Trunks: 1~200
14-01-22
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Caller ID to Voice Mail
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system's ability to send the Caller ID digits to voice mail.
Trunks: 1~200
14-02-10
Analog Trunk Data Setup - Caller ID
Enable (1) or disable (0) a trunk's ability to receive Caller ID name/number information. If this
option is set to `1', the system will suppress ringing and lamping for trunk calls for the first ring in
order to receive the Caller ID information.
Trunks: 1~200
14-02-16
Analog Trunk Data Setup - Caller ID Type
Select the type of Caller ID signal from an analog trunk - FSK (0) or DTMF (1). By default, this
option is set to "0" (FSK).
Trunks: 1~200
15-02-08
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup - Automatic Handsfree
Use this option to set whether pressing a key access a One-Touch Key (1) or if it pre-selects the
key (0).
15-03-09
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Caller ID Function-For External Module
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Caller ID FSK signal for an external Caller ID module or a 3rd party
vendor telephone with Caller ID display. If voice mail is used, this setting must be disabled or the
system integration codes for disconnect will be incorrect. For Caller ID Sender Queuing, set this
option to "1".
15-03-10
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Caller ID Name
Determine if a SLT extension user's telephone should display the Caller ID name (0 = Disable, 1
= Enable).
15-03-11
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Caller ID Type
Select the type of Caller ID signal sent from an SLT extension port - FSK (0) or DTMF (1). By
default, this option is set to "0" (FSK).
Caller ID
2 - 151

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign an Outgoing Call Without Caller ID (ISDN) function key (63) or a Caller ID Log History
key (08) if needed.
20-01-03
System Options - DSP Sender Resource Selection
Set the DSP Sender Resource Selection to "1" (Caller ID Sender) when using the Caller ID
Sender Queuing feature.
20-02-08
System Options for Multiline Telephones - LCD Display Holding Time
This timer determines how long a user's display will show Caller ID for a second incoming call
(0~64800 seconds).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service (1~15) to extensions.
20-08-15
Class of Service (Outgoing Call Service) - Block Outgoing Caller ID
Allow (1) or prevent (0) a user's Class of Service from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a call is placed. If allowed (i.e., block enabled), the system automatically
inserts the Caller ID block code *67 (defined in Program 14-01-21) before the user dialed digits
(this requires Program 14-02-10 to be enabled). If prevented (i.e., block disabled), the system
outdials the call just as it was dialed by the user.
20-09-02
Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Caller ID Display
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to display
incoming Caller ID name/number information.
This is disabled at default.
20-09-04
Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Notification of Incoming Call List
Existence
Determine whether or not the CHECK LIST message is displayed to indicate a missed call
(0 = Off, 1 = On).
20-13-06
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) Automatic Off-Hook Signal
In order for a display telephone to show Caller ID information for a second incoming call, this
assignment must be enabled (1).
20-19-01
System Options for Caller ID - Caller ID Display Formatting
Determine whether the first 10 digits (0) or last 10 digits (1) should be displayed when Caller ID
exceeds 12 digits.
20-19-02
System Options for Caller ID - Caller ID Wait Timer
Determine how long an incoming CO call should wait for Caller ID information from Telco before
the system connects the call.
20-19-03
System Options for Caller ID - Edit Caller ID
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system's ability to add the trunk access code to the stored Caller ID
information. If Caller ID Edit Mode is disabled (0), no trunk access code will be added to the
Caller ID. If this option is enabled (1), the trunk access code entered in Program 10-02-05 will be
added to the beginning of the Caller ID.
2 - 152
Caller ID

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
20-19-05
System ID Options for Caller ID - Caller ID Sender Queuing Timer
With the Caller ID Sender Queuing option, determine how long an incoming call will wait in
queue for a DSP resource to become available (0~64800 seconds). If a resource becomes
available during this time, the call will immediately ring the single line telephone with Caller ID. If
the timer expires before a resource becomes available, then system rings the single line
telephone without Caller ID (until the timer expires, the single line telephone will not ring). If the
queuing timer is set to "0", the system does not queue the incoming call.
20-20-01
Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data - Private Call
Enter the text (up to 24 alphanumeric characters) to be displayed for Caller ID when a user
receives a call which is classified as a private call.
20-20-02
Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data - Out of Service Area
Enter the text (up to 24 alphanumeric characters) to be displayed for Caller ID when a user
receives a call which is classified as a an out-of-service area call.
20-20-03
Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data - Call Information with Error
Enter the text (up to 24 alphanumeric characters) to be displayed for Caller ID when a user
receives a call which is classified as a call with a CID error.
90-03-01
Save Data
This command is used for saving the programmed data on the SRAM and Flash ROM to the
Removable Compact Flash Memory.
90-04-01
Load Data
This command is used for loading the data from inserted Compact Flash Memory to SRAM and
Flash ROM.
Operation
Storing a Number
To store a Caller ID number in an Abbreviated Dial bin:
1.
With a multiline terminal in an idle condition the display shows:
1-01 FRI 09:00AM
301 STA 301
LIST DIR ICM PROG
2.
Press the LIST Softkey. The display shows:
LIST MENU
Redial CID
Caller ID
2 - 153

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
3.
Press the CID Softkey (Caller ID). The display shows:
##: xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
Store DEL
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
= Preview List
= Next List
Store = Store in List
DEL = Delete from List
4.
Press the STORE Softkey. The display shows:
##: xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
STA SYS
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
STA = Store in Station Speed Dial bin.
SYS - Store in System Speed Dial bin.
5.
Press the STA or SYS Softkey. The display shows:
Store to SYS: COMMON
ENTER BIN
6.
Dial the Abbreviated Dial bin in which the number is to be stored. If you press Hold, the next
available Abbreviated Dial bin will be used. The display shows:
SYS XXXX:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx

If all Abbreviated Dial bins are used, the display shows "TABLE IS FULL".
7.
Press HOLD. The display shows:
SYS XXXX
-
2 - 154
Caller ID

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
8.
Enter the name to be associated with the stored number.
Table 2-1 Keys for Entering Names
Use this keypad digit . . .
When you want to. . .
1
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } Æ ¨ Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
2
Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
,
Enter characters:
, + , - . / : ; < = > ? B E S ¢ £
#
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed
- ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use
the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and/or add a space.)
CONF
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
9.
Press Hold. The display shows:
SET SYS
10.
Press Speaker.

The telephone returns to an idle condition.
To store a Caller ID number in a One-Touch key:
1.
With a telephone in an idle condition the display shows:
1-01 FRI 09:00AM
301 STA 301
Caller ID
2 - 155

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
LIST DIR ICM PROG
2.
Press the LIST Softkey. The display shows:
LISTlMENU
Redial CID
3.
Press the CID Softkey (Caller ID). The display shows:
##: xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
Store DEL
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
= Preview List
= Next List
Store = Store in List
DEL = Delete from List
4.
Press the STORE Softkey. The display shows:
##: xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
STA SYS
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
STA = Store in Station Speed Dial bin.
SYS = Store in System Speed Dial bin.
5.
Press the STA Softkey. The display shows:
Store to ONE-TOUCH
ENTER BIN
6.
Press the One-Touch key in which the number is to be stored or dial 1~9, 0. If you press Hold, the
next available One-Touch key will be used. The display shows:
Key ##:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx

If all One-Touch keys are used, the display shows "TABLE IS FULL".
7.
Press Hold. The display shows:
KEY ##
-
2 - 156
Caller ID

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
8.
Enter the name to be associated with the stored number. Refer to Table 2-1 Keys for Entering
Names on page 2-155.
9.
Press Hold. The display shows:
KEY PROG ONE TOUCH
10.
Press Speaker.

The telephone returns to an idle condition.
Temporary Memory
An unanswered call will cause the Call History key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 08) to flash, indicating a new
call has been placed in the temporary memory. If enabled in programming, the telephone's display will
show "CHECK LIST".
1.
Press the Call History key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 08) or press the LIST Softkey and CID.

The last addition to the list is displayed.
2.
Press the ARROW DOWN Softkey to scroll through the list of numbers in memory.
3.
Press the DEL Softkey to delete the entry and scroll to the next entry.
4.
The Call History key will remain on as long as entries remain in memory.
5.
To place a call back to a number in the temporary memory list, with the number to be dialed
displayed, press a line or Speaker key. (Refer to Table 2-1 Keys for Entering Names on page
2-155.)

The outgoing call is placed.
To display Caller ID for a call in Park:
With Program 15-02-08 set to "0" (pre-select) for this feature.
1.
With Program 15-02-08 set to "0" (pre-select) : With a call in park, press the PARK key. (PGM
15-07 or SC 752: 04).
- OR -
With Program 15-02-08 set to "1" (One-Touch): With a call in park, press RECALL then the PARK
key (PGM 15-07 or SC 752 04).
Caller ID
2 - 157

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Checking your Answered/Unanswered Caller ID Calls
To review the last 50 outside calls your extension received:
1.
At a display multiline terminal, press the LIST Softkey.
2.
Press CID.

The first row of your display shows the Caller ID number. If there is an "" next to the call record number in the
left-hand corner, this indicates that it is a call you missed (unanswered). The second row shows the date and time
of the call.

Press the up and down softkeys to see the list of calls available in the buffer.
3.
If the Caller ID includes a name, you can press the HELP key to view the number of the caller.
4.
To call the displayed number, press a line/Call Appearance (CAP) Key.
- OR -
To erase the displayed number without returning the call, the DEL Softkey.
5.
Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 158
Caller ID

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Caller ID Call Return
Description
The Caller ID Call Return feature allows the voice mail system to use Caller ID information captured with
the message to call and connect the person that left the message with the voice mail user that is
checking messages. After the call is ended by either party, the voice mail user returns to checking
messages.
FMS Voice Mail System Software Q revision 05931 database version 6.68 or higher is required.
VMS Voice Mail System Software Q revision 00931 database version 6.68 or higher is required.
Conditions
A caller using a telephone without Softkeys, calling from outside the system, or from a
remote system is prompted to hear Caller ID information and return a call.
Return Call is available for subscriber messages and public messages.
Return Call is accessible to a subscriber during and after message playback.
Return Call is available for new and old messages.
Return Call is accessible to a subscriber using Softkeys in Softkey mode or using DTMF in
voice conversation Mode.
One minute before disconnecting the original caller, voice mail plays a warning prompt and
immediately before disconnecting plays a prompt to indicate that it is returning to the
subscriber mailbox.
When a subscriber listens to a message from a Softkey equipped telephone, and Caller ID
information is unavailable, the voice mail system leaves the second line of the LCD blank.
When Caller ID is disabled on the system, voice mail displays the message count.
From the subscriber options Softkey menu, a subscriber can access a Softkey menu that
allows selection of name or number to be displayed on the LCD during message playback.
The default is name. Voice mail uses this setting to determine the initial display on the LCD
during playback.
Voice mail continues to display Caller ID on the LCD while the post-message playback
menu is still displayed on a telephone equipped with Softkeys.
During return call, the voice mail port is in conference with the box owner and messages.
VMS revision Q008XX v 6.68 and FMS revision Q058XX v 6.68 or higher are also required.
Caller ID Call Return
2 - 159

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
When Centralized Voice Mail is used, the remote voice mail user gets only Caller ID
number when voice mail answers incoming CO calls and performs an Await-Answer
transfer to the remote user. A Call that forwards to voice mail from the remote system does
not have Caller ID information.
Live Record is not available when using Return Call.
A Telephone used as an ACD Plus agent or supervisor station should not have mailboxes
that support Softkeys. Softkeys can be disabled per mailbox in Access Codes Options on
Easymade Application Screen, Page 5 of 6. Place , in front of Hands Free Play (Item N) to
disable Softkeys for a particular station.
The Return Call feature is enabled per mailbox in Expanded Access Codes and can be
enabled for internal numbers only or for both internal and external numbers.
To use this feature for long distance calls, LCR or ARS must be programmed for the voice
mail ports set to dial out. Refer to the Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual for detailed
programming instructions.
The enhanced Caller ID is enabled by setting CID=0,0 on the Integration Options line of
Easymade Switch Setup Screen, Page 1. When Caller ID is already enabled on a system
that is updated, the CID=X,Y setting must be changed to CID=0,0. Only one CID setting is
allowed on this line.
The Return Call parameter must be entered on the Integration Options line of Easymade
Switch Setup Screen, Page 1 to enable this voice mail feature. Default is RCV=6,10 where
6 is the number of rings voice mail tries when returning a call, and 10 is the number of
minutes a retuned call can last.
A trunk access code must be entered on Easymade Switch Setup Screen, Page 1, line 9 so
the Return Call feature can access a trunk to return the call. When this is not entered, the
mailbox user is not prompted to return the call even when Caller ID information is available.
The Rings to answer field on Easymade Applications Screen, Page 2, line 15 must be set to
2 or greater because Caller ID information is provided from Telco between the first and
second ring.
Use Program 14-01-22 Caller ID to Voice Mail to enable or disable the system's ability to
send the Caller ID digits to voice mail.
When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbers are used, this feature is not available.
Default Setting
None
2 - 160
Caller ID Call Return

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
VMP(2)/(4)/(8)-U( )
Related Features
Voice Mail
Programming
None
Operation
None
Caller ID Call Return
2 - 161

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 162
Caller ID Call Return

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Central Office Calls, Answering
Description
The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO (trunks) calls to meet the exact site requirements.
This lets trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions. A maximum of 200
trunks are available. For additional information on making trunks ring, refer to Ring Groups on page
2-707.
Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for trunks. If the trunk is not answered at its
original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group (this ring group applies to DIL or non-DIL
trunks). This could help a secretary that covers calls for their boss. If the boss does not answer the call,
it rings the secretary's telephone after a programmable interval.
Universal Answer
Universal Answer allows an employee to answer a call by going to any multiline terminal and dialing a
unique Universal Answer code. The employee does not have to know the trunk number or dial any other
codes to pick up the ringing trunk. You will normally set up Universal Answer along with Universal Night
Answer (refer to Night Service on page 2-617). When a Universal Night Answer call rings the External
Paging, an employee can answer the call from the first available telephone. You might also want to use
Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume of normal telephone ringing
is not adequate. After hearing the ringing over the Paging, an employee can then easily pick up the call
from a shop telephone.
The Automatic Answer of Universal Answer Calls option (Program 20-10-07) determines whether or not
the extension has the Auto Answer feature for ringing calls. This option allows a user to simply lift the
handset to answer a ringing call; dialing the service code it is not necessary.
Additional Trunk Ring Tones
Various ring tone patterns and melodies for incoming calls are available (Program 22-03-11); Ring Tone
Patterns 1~4 and Melodies 1~5.
Sidetone Volume Setup
This option allows system programming for the multiline terminal side tone volume. There are two levels,
based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Central Office Calls, Answering
2 - 163

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Conditions
The incoming ring group assignment programmed in 41-03-01 overrides the setting in
Program 22-05-01.
Ringing calls can be picked up regardless of access map programming.
An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset.
Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time
period. Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing
calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.
Line keys and Call Appearance (CAP) Keys simplify answering outside calls.
If the Absent text message has been set by the originating extension, the destination
extension will display the assigned text message instead of the Reason for Transfer
message.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
Any Trunk ETU (i.e., COI (4/8), COID (4/8), DID, DTI, etc.)
2 - 164
Central Office Calls, Answering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Call Forwarding
Directed Call Pickup
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Do Not Disturb
Group Call Pickup
ISDN Compatibility
Line Preference
Long Conversation Cutoff
Night Service (Universal Night Answer)
Programmable Function Keys
Selectable Display Messaging
Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Central Office Calls, Answering
2 - 165

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Programming
10-03-03
ETU Setup, For SLIU Unit - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
10-03-04
ETU Setup, For SLIU Unit - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for 500/2500 type single
line telephones.
10-08-01
Pre-Ringing Setup
Enable (1) or disable (0) pre-ringing for outside calls. This setting affects all system trunks. This
sets how a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of ringing occurs as soon as
the trunk's LED flashes. The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle.
Without pre-ringing, the call starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs. This
may cause a ring delay, depending on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle.
11-11-13
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Display Language Selection for
Multiline Terminals
Select the service code which can be used at an extension to change the displayed language on
a multiline terminal's display (default: 678).
11-12-30
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Specified Trunk Answer
If required, redefine the service code used to answer a specific trunk which is either ringing or on
hold (default: 672).
14-01-02
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
14-01-03
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for each trunk.
Trunks: 1~200
14-02-02
Analog Trunk Data Setup - Ring Detect Type
For each trunk, enable delayed ringing (0) or immediate ringing (1).
Trunks: 1~200
14-05-01
Trunk Groups
Assign trunks to trunk groups then go to Program 14-06-01 below to set up Trunk Group
Routing.
Trunk Groups: 1~100
14-06-01
Trunk Group Routing
Set up trunk routes and then go to Program 23-03-01 below to assign the trunk routes to
extensions. An extension user can use Universal Answer to answer a call if the ringing trunk is in
its assigned route.
Trunk Group Routes: 1~100
2 - 166
Central Office Calls, Answering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
14-07-01
Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets the access options for trunks. Ring Group
programming overrides Access Map programming.
Trunk Access Maps: 1~200
15-01-05
Basic Extension Data Setup - Restriction for Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
Enable (1) or disable (0) supervised dial detection for an extension.
15-02-01
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Select the language, which should be used on a telephone display:
0 = Japanese
5 = Spanish
1 = English
6 = Dutch
2 = German
7 = Portuguese
3 = French
8 = Norwegian
4 = Italian
9 = Danish
15-02-02
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup - Trunk Ring Tone
Trunks ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range selected in 22-03-01 and the settings
made with either Service Code 720 or Program 15-02-02.
15-02-22
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup, Multiple Incoming From Intercom and Trunk
When this option is set to `0' (disabled), incoming calls to an extension will indicate on any
Hotline keys for that extension as solid (busy). When this option is set to `1' (enabled), lamping
is determined by the setting of Program 22-01-01 Incoming Call Priority. If set to trunk priority
(1), the Hotline key will lamp solid when a trunk call rings in. If set to intercom priority (0), the
Hotline key will not lamp for incoming trunk calls, but will lamp solid for intercom calls.
15-03-03
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Terminal Type
Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after the initial call setup. For Voice Mail, always
enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).
15-06-01
Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions.
Trunk Access Maps: 1~200
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
To have outside calls ring specific keys, assign trunks to line keys (code 01 + trunk). You can
also program function keys as trunk group (02) or Call Appearance (CAP) Keys (08 + bin).
Use a Call Redirect key (49) to allow a user to transfer a call to another extension or voice mail
without answering the call.
Trunks: 1~100
Central Office Calls, Answering
2 - 167

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
20-02-09
System Options for Multiline Telephones - Disconnect Supervision
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) disconnect supervision for the system trunks.
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-10-07
Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Automatic Answer of Universal Calls
For extension Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to use
Auto-Answer to pick up Universal Answer calls. This allows a user to simply pick up the handset
instead of dialing a service code.
20-13-13
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Continued Dialing
For extension Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use Continued
Dialing, which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension.
20-13-23
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Display the Reason for Transfer
For extension Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to display the
Reason for Transfer message.
21-01-15
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature.
21-01-16
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Supervise Dial Detection Timer
With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is not detected after the
extension answers an incoming line, the system determines the call is unable to complete and
releases the DTMF receiver (0~64800 seconds).
21-01-17
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Restriction Digit in Outgoing Disable on Incoming
Line
With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, determine the number of digits (0~9) to be
dialed before the call should be disconnected.
22-01-01
System Options for Incoming Calls, Incoming Call Priority
Use this option to determine if intercom calls or trunk calls have answer priority when both are
ringing simultaneously (0 = Intercom Call Priority, 1 = Trunk Call Priority). Refer to Program
15-02-22 for lamping conditions.
22-01-02
System Options for Incoming Calls - Incoming Call Ring No Answer Alarm
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Incoming Call RNA Alarm. If enabled, the ring cadence will change
for a call that rings longer than the interval set in 22-01-03.
22-01-03
System Options for Incoming Calls - Ring No Answer Alarm Time
Set the Ring No Answer Alarm interval (0~64800 seconds). If a trunk rings a multiline terminal
longer than this interval, the system changes the ring cadence.
22-01-04
System Options for Incoming Calls - DIL No Answer Time
If an incoming trunk call rings longer than this interval, it reroutes to the Ring Group set in
Program 22-08-01 (default = 0 seconds).
2 - 168
Central Office Calls, Answering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Select the trunk type (0~7) for each trunk at each time mode (1~8): (default = Normal).
0 = Normal
4 = DIL
1 = VRS
5 = E&M Tie Line
2 = DISA
6 = Delayed DID
3 = DID
7 = ANI/DNIS
Trunks: 1~200
22-03-01
Trunk Ring Tone Range
Assign Ring Tone Ranges to trunks. Trunks ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range
selected in 22-03-01 and the settings made with either Service Code 720 or Program 15-02-02.
22-04-01
Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extensions to ring groups.
22-05-01
Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
To have the trunks ring extensions, assign trunks to a Ring Group. The incoming ring group
assignment programmed in 41-03-01 overrides the setting in this program.
22-06-01
Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Indicate whether the trunks in the Ring Group assigned in 22-04-01 should ring (1) or not ring
(0).
22-07-01
DIL Assignment
Assign the destination extension for each DIL incoming trunk (001~200).
For this selection to work, set 22-02-01 to 4 = DIL.
22-08-01
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
If an incoming trunk call rings longer than the DIL No Answer Time (Program 22-01-04), it routes
to the destination you specify in this option. Determine if the destination should be a Ring Group,
In-Skin/External Voice Mail, or Central Voice Mail.
Ring Groups: 1~100
102 = In-Skin/External Voice Mail
103 = Centralized Voice Mail
Central Office Calls, Answering
2 - 169

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
23-03-01
Universal Answer/Auto Answer
For Universal Answer, assign trunk routes set in Program 14-06-01 to extensions. An extension
user can use Universal Answer to answer a call if the ringing trunk is in its assigned route.
Trunk Group Routes: 1~100
82-08-01
Sidetone Volume Setup
Use this program to adjust of the multiline terminal side tone volume. There are two levels,
based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Operation
To answer an incoming trunk call:
1.
Lift the handset.
To use Universal Answer to answer a call ringing over the Paging system:
1.
Go off-hook.

Depending on system programming, this may answer the call and you can skip Step 2.
2.
Dial #0.

If you hear error tone, your extension's Class of Service prevents Universal Answer.
To listen to the incoming trunk ring choices:
1.
Press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial 711 + 2.
3.
Select the ringing (1~8) and tone range (1~4) you want to check.
4.
Go back to step 3 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up.
To change the ringing of your incoming trunk:
1.
Press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial 720 + 2.
3.
Select the ringing (1~8).
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 170
Central Office Calls, Answering

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Central Office Calls, Placing
Description
The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk calls. This lets
you customize the call placing options to meet site requirements and each individual's needs. A user
can place a call by:
J
Pressing Line Keys
J
Pressing a Trunk Group key
J
Pressing a Trunk Group Routing (dial 9) key
J
Dialing a code for a specific trunk (#9 + the trunk number)
J
Dialing a code for a Trunk Group (704 + group number)
J
Dialing a code for Trunk Group Routing or ARS (9)
J
Dialing an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (which you must define)
J
Pressing or Using a Speed Dial bin
There are 200 available trunks.
Trunk Port Disable
The system provides a service code (default: 645) which can be used by an extension user to block a
trunk for outgoing calls. The user which busied out the trunk will still have access to it. All other users will
be blocked from seizing it to place an outgoing call. The trunk, however, can still be answered by any
users programmed with the trunk access.
Sidetone Volume Setup
Allows the system programming for the multiline terminal side tone volume. There are two levels, based
on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Conditions
If the trunk name seize display is enabled in programming, the Call Timer starts
automatically after the user places a trunk call. Disabling the trunk name seize display also
disables the Call Timer.
The system can automatically select the correct type of line to use based on the number
dialed and the time.
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 171

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place a trunk call
without first lifting the handset or pressing Speaker. Users without Automatic Handsfree can
preselect a line key before lifting the handset or pressing Speaker.
Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time
period. Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing
calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.
An extension's Toll Class of Service may prevent them from dialing certain numbers.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline terminals
Required Component(s)
Any Trunk ETU (i.e. COI (4/8), COID (4/8), DID, DTI, etc.)
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display/Call Timer
Automatic Route Selection
Dial Tone Detection
Handsfree
Long Conversation Cutoff/Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Microphone Cutoff
Programmable Function Keys
2 - 172
Central Office Calls, Placing

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Toll Restriction
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Groups
Programming
10-03-03
Setup, For SLIU Unit - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
10-03-04
Setup, For SLIU Unit - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for 500/2500 type single
line telephones.
11-01-01
System Numbering
Setup number to be used for Service codes to access trunks.
11-09-01
Trunk Access Code
If required, change the single-digit Trunk Access Code (normally 9). If you change this code, you
must also review the settings in 11-01-01 for the new code selected.
11-09-02
Trunk Access Code - Alternate Trunk Route Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in 11-01-01 for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
11-10-27
Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Trunk Port Disable
Define the service code which should be used by an extension user to block a trunk from being
used for outgoing calls (Default: 645).
11-11-13
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Display Language Selection for
Multiline Terminal
Select the service code which can be used at an extension to change the displayed language on
a multiline terminal's display (default: 678).
11-12-01
Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
Define the service code which should be used by an extension user to select outgoing Trunk
Group (code 704).
14-01-01
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Trunk Name
To make identifying calls easier, assign a name to each trunk.
14-01-02
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
14-01-03
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Assign a CODEC Gain Type to each trunk. This sets the amount of gain (amplification) for the
selected trunk.
14-01-07
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Outgoing Calls
For each trunk, allow (1) or prevent (0) outgoing calls.
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 173

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
14-01-10
Basic Trunk Data Setup - DTMF Tones for Outgoing Calls
For each trunk, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to hear the DTMF of the digits dialed when
placing the outgoing call.
14-02-05
Analog Trunk Data Setup - Dial Tone Detection for Directly Accessed Trunk
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) dial tone detection for directly accessed trunks. If
disabled, the system outdials on the trunks without monitoring for dial tone.
14-02-11
Analog Trunk Data Setup - Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) the system's ability to skip over a trunk if dial tone is
not detected. This option pertains to calls placed using Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, Speed
Dial, Automatic Route Selection (ARS), Last Number Redial or Save Number dialed. It does not
pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls.
14-02-14
Analog Trunk Data Setup - Loop Start/Ground Start
Select loop start (0) or ground start (1) for the trunk.
14-05-01
Trunk Groups
Assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also assign the outbound priority for trunks within the
group. When users dial up the trunk group, they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the
outbound priority entry.
Trunks: 1~200
Trunk Groups: 1~100
At default, all group are assigned to Trunk Group 1.
14-06-01
Trunk Group Routing
Set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups you assigned in Program 14-05-01. When
users dial 9, the system routes their calls in the order (priority) you specify.
Trunk Routing Table: 1~100
14-07-01
Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets the access options for trunks.
Trunk Access Maps: 1~200
15-02-01
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Select the language which should be used on a multiline terminal's display:
0 = Japanese
5 = Spanish
1 = English
6 = Dutch
2 = German
7 = Portuguese
3 = French
8 = Norwegian
4 = Italian
9 = Danish
15-02-08
Multiline Telephone Basic Setup - Automatic Handsfree
Determine if when a One Touch/DSS key is press on the extension's phone will it automatically
dial (1), or is preselected (0) and you have to go off-hook to dial.
2 - 174
Central Office Calls, Placing

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
15-03-03
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Terminal Type
Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after the initial call setup. For Voice Mail, always
enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).
15-06-01
Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions.
Trunk Access Maps: 1~200
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
To simplify placing calls, assign function keys for placing trunk calls: Line keys (code 01 +
trunk), Trunk Group keys (code 02 + group), Call Appearance (CAP) Keys (code ,08 + key # ).
Trunks: 1~200
20-02-06
System Options for Multiline Telephones - Preselection Time
Set the preselection interval (0~64800 seconds). When a multiline terminal user preselects a
line key, the system remembers the preselection for this interval.
20-02-09
System Options for Multiline Telephones - Disconnect Supervision
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) disconnect supervision for the system trunks.
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to extensions.
20-07-12
Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Trunk Port Disable
For each Class of Service (1~15), enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use the Trunk
Port Disable feature.
20-08-02
Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Trunk Calls
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) trunk calling.
20-13-13
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Continued Dialing
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Continued Dialing which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension.
21-01-15
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature.
21-01-16
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Supervise Dial Detection Timer
With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is not detected after the
extension answers an incoming line, the system determines the call is unable to complete and
releases the DTMF receiver (0~64800 seconds).
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 175

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
21-01-17
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Restriction Digit in Outgoing Disable on Incoming
Line
With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, determine the number of digits (0~9) to be
dialed before the call should be disconnected.
21-02-01
Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Assign Program 14-06 routes to extensions. (Trunk Group Routes: 1~100)
21-15-01
Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions
Designate the trunk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code.
Refer to "Trunk Group Routing" to set up outbound routing. (Trunk Group Routes: 1~100)
24-02-07
System Options for Transfer - Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone
This timer will start when a trunk begins talking with another trunk (e.g., trunk-to-trunk transfer,
outgoing from trunk, Tandem Trunking) (0~64800 seconds). Assign the time before a Trunk-to-
Trunk call will be disconnected.
82-08-01
Sidetone Volume Setup
Use this program to adjust of the multiline terminal side tone volume. There are two levels,
based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Operation
To place a call over a trunk group:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial 704.
3.
Dial trunk group number (001~100).
4.
Dial the number.
- OR -
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the trunk group key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: ,02 + group).
2.
Dial the number.
To place a call using Trunk Group Routing:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial 9.

If your system has an Alternate Trunk Route Access code, you may dial that instead.
2 - 176
Central Office Calls, Placing

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
3.
Dial the number.
- OR -
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 752: ,05).
2.
Dial the number.
To place a call over a specific trunk:
1.
Dial #9.
2.
Dial the line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
3.
Dial the number.
- OR -
1.
At the multiline terminal, press line key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 752: 001 to 200).
2.
Dial the number.
To Busy Out a Trunk from Outbound Usage:
1.
Press Speaker + 645 + Trunk Number (001~200) + 1.

The user which busied out the trunk will still have access to it. All other users will be blocked from seizing it to
place an outgoing call. The trunk, however, can still be answered by any users programmed with the trunk
access.
To Remove a Trunk from a Busied Out State:
1.
Press Speaker + 645 + Trunk Number (001~200) + 0.
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 177

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 178
Central Office Calls, Placing

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Class of Service
Description
Class of Service (COS) sets various features and dialing options (called items) for extensions. The
system allows any number of extensions to share the same Class of Service. An extension can have a
different Class of Service for each of the Night Service modes. This lets you program a different set of
dialing options for daytime operation, nighttime operation and even during lunch breaks. An extension's
Class of Service can be changed in system programming or via a Service Code (normally 677). There
are 15 available Classes of Service.
Conditions
Before assigning a new COS, make sure the new COS matches the old COS or you may
enable options, which the extension should not have or remove options, which it should
have.
An extension can have a different Class of Service for each Service mode. At default, the
Mode names are assigned as follows:
J
Mode 1 = No setting
J
Mode 2 = Night
J
Mode 3 = Mid-night
J
Mode 4 = Rest
J
Mode 5 = Day2
J
Mode 6 = Night2
J
Mode 7 = Midnight2
J
Mode 8 = Rest2
Class of Service
2 - 179

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default Setting
The attendant (extension 101) has Class of Service 15 in all Night Service modes. All other
extensions have Class of Service 1 in all Night Service modes.
Refer to Table 2-2 through Table 2-8 in this section for the default settings of the individual
options.
If changing Class of Service via Service Code:
J
An extension can use Service Code 677 to change another extension's Class of Service
(Program 20-13-28 = 1).
J
An extension can automatically block another extension's attempt to change their Class of
Service via Service Code 677 (Program 20-13-28 = 0).
J
The default Service Code for this option is 677 (Program 11-11-24 = 677).
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Night Service (Universal Night Answer)
Programming
11-11-24
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Change Extension Class of Service
If required, use this option to change the Service Code a user dials to change an extension's
Class of Service.
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service to extensions (1~15). Any Class of Service assignments you
change using Service Code 677 (see below) automatically update this program.
2 - 180
Class of Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
20-07~20-14
Class of Service Options
Set the options in a Class of Service. Refer to Table 2-2 through Table 2-8.
If changing Class of Service via Service Code:
20-13-28
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Allow Station COS to be Changed
Use this option to permit (1) or block (0) another extension from changing this extension's
Class of Service via Service Code 677.
Table 2-2 Class of Service Options (Administrator Level), Program 20-07
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
COS
Program
COS 15
01~14
01
Manual Night Service Enabled
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-01
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use manual Night
1 = On
Service Switching.
02
Changing the Music on Hold Tone
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-02
Turn off or on an extension's ability to change the Music
1 = On
on Hold tone.
03
Time Setting
0 = Off
1
1
11-10-03
Turn off or on an extension's ability to set the Time via
1 = On
Service Code 728.
04
Storing Speed Dialing Entries
0 = Off
1
1
11-10-04
Turn off or on an extension's ability to store System or
1 = On
Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers.
05
Set/Cancel Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
0 = Off
0
0
11-10-06
1 = On
11-10-07
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use the
11-10-08
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service codes.
06
- Not Used -
07
- Not Used -
08
- Not Used -
09
- Not Used -
10
Programmable Function Key Programming (Appearance
0 = Off
1
1
20-13-18
Level)
1 = On
Turn off or on an extension's ability to program their
Appearance function keys using Service Code 852 (by
default).
11
Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk only)
0 = Off
0
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Forced Trunk
1 = On
Disconnect.
Class of Service
2 - 181

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-2 Class of Service Options (Administrator Level), Program 20-07 (Continued)
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
COS
Program
COS 15
01~14
12
Trunk Port Disable
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-27
Turn off or on an extension's ability to busy out a trunk.
1 = On
using Service Code 645. The user which busied out the
trunk will still have access to the trunk for placing
outgoing calls. All other users will be blocked from
seizing the trunk to place an outgoing call. The trunk,
however, can still be answered by any users
programmed with the trunk access.
13
VRS Record
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-20
Turn off or on an extension's ability to dial service code
1 = On
616 and record, erase and listen to VRS messages.
14
VRS General Message Listen
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-21
Turn off or on an extension's ability to dial 4 or Service
1 = On
Code 611 and listen to the General Message.
15
VRS General Message Record
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-22
Turn off or on an extension's ability to dial Service Code
1 = On
612 and record, listen to or erase the General Message.
16
- Not Used -
17
- Not Used -
18
SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension Data
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-23
1 = On
19
SMDR Printout Accumulated STG Data
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-24
1 = On
20
SMDR Printout Accumulated Account Code Data
0 = Off
0
1
11-10-25
1 = On
21
Electra Elite IPK II Wireless Registration by Service Code
0 = Off
0
0
11-10-30
Turn off or on an extension's ability to register or
1 = On
11-10-31
unregister an Electra Elite IPK II Wireless handset using
the service codes defined in Program 11-10-30 and 11-
10-31.
23
CO Message Waiting Indication Callback Number
0 = Off
0
0
Programming
1 = On
24
Set/Cancel for Private Call Refuse
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
25
Set/Cancel for Caller ID Refuse
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
2 - 182
Class of Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table 2-2 Class of Service Options (Administrator Level), Program 20-07 (Continued)
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
COS
Program
COS 15
01~14
26
Dial-In Mode Switching
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
27
Do-Not-Call Administrator
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
28
Set Automated Attendant Message Number
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
Table 2-3 Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service), Program 20-08
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS
Program
01~14
15
01
Intercom Calls
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on Intercom calling for the extension.
1 = On
02
Trunk Calls
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on outgoing trunk calling for the extension.
1 = On
03
System Speed Dialing
0 = Off
1
1
11-12-10
1 = On
04
Group Abbreviated Dialing
0 = Off
1
1
11-12-11
1 = On
05
Dial Number Preview
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Dial Number
1 = On
Preview.
06
Toll Restriction Override
0 = Off
0
0
21-01-07,
Turn off or on Toll Restricting Override (Service Code
1 = On
21-07
663).
11-11-36
07
Repeat Redial
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Repeat Redial.
1 = On
08
Toll Restriction Dial Block
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Dial Block.
1 = On
09
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on Ringdown Extension for extensions with this
1 = On
COS.
Class of Service
2 - 183

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-3 Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service), Program 20-08 (Continued)
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS
Program
01~14
15
10
Switching from Handsfree Answerback to Forced Intercom
0 = Off
1
1
Ringing
1 = On
Turn off or on an extension's ability to force Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing
Intercom calls.
11
Protect ICM Call Mode Switching by Caller
0 = Off
0
0
When an extension is set to ring mode for ICM calls,
1 = On
enabling this option prevents callers from changing the
call to voice announce mode.
12
Department Group Step Calling
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Department
1 = On
Group Step Calling.
13
ISDN CLIP
0 = Off
0
0
Determine if the ISDN calling line identity presentation
1 = On
and screening indicators are to be allowed.
14
Call Address Information
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
15
Block Outgoing Caller ID
0 = Off
0
0
14-01-20
Turn off or on the system's ability to automatically block
1 = On
14-01-21
outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call.
If this option is on, the system automatically inserts the
Caller ID block code ,67 (defined in Program 14-01-21)
before the user's dialed digits.
16
Display E911 Dialed Extension Name and Number
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to display the name
1 = On
and number of the extension that dialed 911.
17
ARS Override of Trunk Access Map
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to override the trunk
1 = On
access map programming for outgoing calls.
19
Hotline for Speaker
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extensions' ability to activate hotline or
1 = On
ringdown when pressing the Speaker key.
20
Show Calling Party Information for CCIS
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extensions ability to display calling party
1 = On
information on a CCIS trunk call.
2 - 184
Class of Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table 2-4 Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service), Program 20-09
Default
Item
Input
Related
Item
No.
Data
COS
Program
COS 15
01~14
01
Second Call for DID/ DISA/ DIL/ E&M
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on the extension's ability to receive a second
1 = On
call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
With this option set to `1', the destination extension must be busy
in order for a second DNIS caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does not have a line or Call Appearance
(CAP) Keys available for the second call and a previous call is
ringing the extension but has not yet been answered, the second
caller will hear busy regardless of this program's setting.
02
Caller ID Display
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on the Caller ID display at an extension.
1 = On
03
Sub Address Identification
0 = Off
0
0
Define whether an extension displays the Caller
1 = On
Sub-Address.
04
Notification for Incoming Call List Existence
0 = Off
0
0
20-09-02
Determine whether an extension's display will show
1 = On
"Check List" when an incoming call has been missed by a
user.
05
Setting Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing
0 = Off
1
1
11-11-15
Turn off or on an extension's ability to enable Handsfree
1 = On
11-11-16
Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming
Intercom calls.
06
Incoming Time Information Display
0 = Off
0
0
If this option is set to "1", the Incoming Call Time is
1 = On
displayed on the multiline terminal's LCD while the
telephone is ringing.
07
Call Queuing
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on and extension's ability to have multiple calls
1 = On
queue to their extension.
Class of Service
2 - 185

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-5 Class of Service Options (Answer Service), Program 20-10
Default
Item
Input
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS 15
01~14
01
Group Call Pickup (Within Group)
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension's
1 = On
own Pickup Group as well as ring group calls (Service Code
,#).
02
Group Call Pickup (Another Group)
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group
1 = On
(Service Code 769).
03
Group Call Pickup for Specific Group
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on Group Call Pickup for a specific group using
1 = On
service code 768.
04
Group Call Pickup
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to pick up a call ringing into
1 = On
a Pickup Group (Service Codes ,# and 756).
05
Directed Call Pickup for Own Group
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing an
1 = On
extension's own Pickup Group (Service Code 756).
06
Meet Me Conference and Paging
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Meet Me Conference
1 = On
and Paging.
07
Automatic Answer of Universal Calls
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Universal Auto
1 = On
Answer (no service code required).
08
Auto Off-Hook Answer for Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to answer an incoming call
1 = On
on a Call Arrival (CAR) Key simply by lifting the handset.
09
Call Pickup for Callback
0 = Off
1
0
Turn off or on an extensions ability to us Call Pickup to Pick up
1 = On
Callback calls.
10
Answer Preset
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
2 - 186
Class of Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table 2-6 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service), Program 20-11
Default
Item
Item
Input Data
No.
COS
COS 15
01~14
01
Call Forward Immediate
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to initiate Call
1 = On
Forwarding Immediate.
02
Call Forward When Busy
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Call Forward
1 = On
When Busy.
03
Call Forwarding When Unanswered
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Call Forward
1 = On
When Unanswered.
04
Call Forwarding (Both Ringing)
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to activate Call
1 = On
Forwarding with Both Ringing.
05
Call Forwarding With Follow Me
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to initiate Call
1 = On
Forwarding with Follow Me.
06
Unscreened Transfer
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Unscreened
1 = On
Transfer.
07
Transfer Without Holding
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Transfer Without
1 = On
Holding.
08
Transfer Information Display
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's incoming Transfer pre-answer
1 = On
display.
09
Group Hold Initiate
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to initiate a Group Hold.
1 = On
10
Group Hold Answer
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to pick up a call on
1 = On
Group Hold.
11
Automatic On Hook Transfer
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Automatic On
1 = On
Hook Transfer.
12
Call Forwarding Off-Premise
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to set up Call
1 = On
Forwarding Off-Premise for their telephone.
Class of Service
2 - 187

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-6 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service), Program 20-11 (Continued)
Default
Item
Item
Input Data
No.
COS
COS 15
01~14
13
Operator Transfer After Hold Callback
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to have a call which
1 = On
recalls from hold transfer to the operator.
14
Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction option.
1 = On
If enabled, trunk-to-trunk transfer is not possible.
15
VRS Personal Greeting
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to dial Service Code ,4
1 = On
7 to record, listen to or erase the Personal Greeting
Message.
16
Call Redirect
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on a multiline terminal user's ability to transfer a
1 = On
call to a pre-defined destination (such as an operator, voice
mail, or another extension) without answering the call.
17
Set/Cancel Department Group Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension user's ability to set Trunk-to-
1 = On
Trunk Forwarding for a Department Group.
18
No Recall
0 = Off (Allow)
0
0
Allow (0) or deny (1) answered Transferred calls from
1 = On (Deny)
recalling the originating extension.
19
Normal/Extended Park
0 = Off
0
0
Determine if an extension's Class of Service should allow
(Normal)
either a normal or extended Park.
1 = On
(Extended)
20
No Callback
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to receive Callbacks.
1 = On
21
Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
0 = Off
0
0
Allow (0) or deny (1) an extension users's ability to set up a
1 = On
tandem/conference call automatically when they hang up.
22
Restrict Unsupervised Conference
0 = Off
0
0
Allow or Deny an extensions ability to initiate a Trunk to
1 = On
Trunk Transfer (Tandem Trunking).
23
VE/SE Call Forward Set/Cancel
0 = Off
1
1
Allow or Deny an extension to set/cancel Call Forwarding
1 = On
for a virtual extension or Secondary Incoming extension.
2 - 188
Class of Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table 2-6 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service), Program 20-11 (Continued)
Default
Item
Item
Input Data
No.
COS
COS 15
01~14
24
Park Hold Mode
0 = Off (Non-
1
1
Define if an extensions Park & Hold mode is Exclusive or
Exclusive)
Non-Exclusive.
1 = On
(Exclusive)
25
Transfer Park Call
0 = Off
1
1
Turn on or off an extensions ability to transfer a parked call.
1 = On
Table 2-7 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13
Default
Item
Item
Input Data
No.
COS
COS 15
01~14
01
Long Conversation Alarm
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on the Warning Tone for Long Conversation
1 = On
(not for single line telephones)
02
Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Long
1 = On
Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls.
03
Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Long
1 = On
Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls.
04
Call Forwarding/DND Override
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Call Forwarding/
1 = On
DND Override.
05
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to receive off-hook
1 = On
signals.
06
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
0 =Off
1
1
Allows a busy extension to manually (0) or automatically
(Manually)
(1) receive off-hook signals.
1 = On
(Automatically)
07
Message Waiting
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to leave Message
1 = On
Waiting.
Class of Service
2 - 189

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-7 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13 (Continued)
Default
Item
Item
Input Data
No.
COS
COS 15
01~14
08
Conference
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to initiate a conference
1 = On
or Meet Me Conference
09
Privacy Release
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to initiate a Voice Call
1 = On
Conference
10
Barge-In Mode
0 = Off (Speech)
0
0
Enables the extension's Barge-In to be speech mode (0)
1 = On (Monitor)
or Monitor mode (1).
11
Room Monitor, Initiating Extension
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to initiate Room
1 = On
Monitor
12
Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to be monitored
1 = On
13
Continued Dialing
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Continued
1 = On
Dialing which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on
extension.
14
Department Calling
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to call a Department
1 = On
Group.
15
Barge-In, Initiate
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on Barge-In at the initiating extension.
1 = On
16
Barge-In, Receive
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on Barge-In at the receiving extension.
1 = On
17
Barge-In Tone/Display
0 = Off
1
1
Use this option to turn off or on the Barge-In tone. If on,
1 = On
callers hear an alert tone and their display indicates the
Barge-In when another extension barges into their
conversation. If off, there is no alert tone or display
indication.
18
Programmable Function Key Programming (General Level)
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to program their
1 = On
General function keys using Service Code 751 (by
default).
19
Selectable Display Messaging
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Selectable
1 = On
Display Messaging.
2 - 190
Class of Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table 2-7 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13 (Continued)
Default
Item
Item
Input Data
No.
COS
COS 15
01~14
20
Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on operator alert when an extension improperly
1 = On
enters an Account Code or violates Toll Restriction.
21
Extension Name
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to program its name.
1 = On
22
Busy Status Display
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on the ability to display the detail state of called
1 = On
party.
23
Display the Reason for Transfer
0 = Off
0
0
Select whether an extension should display the reason a
1 = On
call is being transferred to their extension (Call Forward
Busy, Call Forward No Answer, DND).
24
Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on a user's ability to press a line key to barge
1 = On
into an outside call. The Barge-In feature must be enabled
if this option is to be used.
26
Group Listen
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to use Group Listen.
1 = On
27
Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension
0 = Off
1
1
If set to `1', you can call a busy extension which is talking
1 = On
on a virtual extension key. Program 20-13-06 (Call
Waiting) must be set to off for this option to work.
28
Allow Class of Service to be Changed
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on the ability of an extension's COS to be
1 = On
changed via Service Code 177.
29
Paging Display
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extension's ability to display paging
1 = On
information.
30
Background Music
0 = Off
1
1
In an extension's Class of Service, turn off or on an
1 = On
extension from turning Background Music on and off.
31
Connected Line Identification (COLP)
0 = Off
0
0
1 = On
32
Deny Multiple Barge-Ins
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on the extension's ability to have multiple user's
1 = On
Barge-In to their conversation.
Class of Service
2 - 191

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-7 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13 (Continued)
Default
Item
Item
Input Data
No.
COS
COS 15
01~14
33
ACD Supervisor's Position Enhancement
0 = Off
0
0
This option must be on in order for the operator to use
1 = On
service codes in Program 11-13-10 through 11-13-13.
34
Block Manual off-hook Signaling
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to block off-hook
1 = On
signals manually sent from a co-worker.
35
Block Camp-On
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on an extension's ability to block callers from
1 = On
dialing 2 to Camp-On.
36
Call Duration Timer
0 = Off
1
1
In an extension's Class of Service, turn off or on an
1 = On
extension's Call Timer. The system waits until the interdigit
timer (Program 21-01-01) expires before beginning this
timer.
38
Headset Ringing
0 = Off
0
0
In an extension's Class of Service, turn off or on an
1 = On
extension's ability to use the Headset ringing.
39
ACD Queue Status Display
0 = Off
0
0
Turn off or on the ACD Queue Status Display for an
1 = On
extension's Class of Service. Any extension which has this
option enabled will also hear the queue alarm.
40
Do Not Disturb
0 = Off
1
1
This option will allow or prevent the user from being able to
1 = On
use the Do Not Disturb feature.
41
VM Message Indication on DSS Key
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on the ability for an DSS BLF key of an
1 = On
extension to show VM indication.
42
Extension Data Swap Enabling
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extensions ability to use the Station
1 = On
Relocation feature.
44
Live Monitor
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on an extensions ability to use Live Monitor.
1 = On
2 - 192
Class of Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Table 2-8 Class of Service Options (DISA/E&M Service), Program 20-14
Default
Item
Input
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS 15
01~14
01
First Digit Absorption
0 = Off
0
0
For tie lines, enable or disable the ability to absorb (ignore)
1 = On
the first incoming digit. Use this to make the tie trunk
compatible with 3- and 4-digit tie line service. This option
does not apply to DISA.
02
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access
0 = Off
1
1
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's
1 = On
ability to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route
Selection (ARS).
03
Trunk Group Access
0 = Off
1
1
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's
1 = On
ability to access trunk groups for outside calls (Service Code
704).
04
System Speed Dialing
0 = Off
0
0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's
1 = On
ability to use the system's System Speed Dialing.
05
Operator Calling
0 = Off
1
1
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's
1 = On
ability to dial 0 for the telephone system operator.
06
Internal Paging
0 = Off
1
1
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's
1 = On
ability to use the telephone system's Internal Paging.
07
External Paging
0 = Off
1
1
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's
1 = On
ability to use the telephone system's External Paging.
08
Direct Trunk Access
0 = Off
0
0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's
1 = On
ability to use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code 815).
09
Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN T-point>
0 = Off
0
0
This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller's ability to
1 = On
use Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service Code *26). This
option is not available to DISA callers.
10
Call Forward Setting by Remote Via DISA
0 = Off
0
0
Enable or disable a DISA callers ability to use the Call
1 = On
Forward service codes (Programs 11-11-01 through
11-11-05).
Class of Service
2 - 193

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Table 2-8 Class of Service Options (DISA/E&M Service), Program 20-14 (Continued)
Default
Item
Input
Item
No.
Data
COS
COS 15
01~14
11
DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In
0 = Off
0
0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller's
1 = On
ability to use the Barge-In feature.
12
Retrieve Park Hold
0 = Off
1
1
Turn off or on the ability for a DISA caller to retrieve parked or
1 = On
held calls.
Operation
To change an extension's Class of Service (via Service Code 677):
1.
Press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial 677.
3.
Dial the extension number you want to change.

You see: MODE1:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
The extension you dial may be set to block your attempt to change their Class of Service.
4.
Enter the Day 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

You see: MODE2:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
5.
Enter the Night 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

You see: MODE3:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
6.
Enter the Midnight 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
Hold.

You see: MODE4:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
7.
Enter the Rest 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

You see: MODE5:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
8.
Enter the Day 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

You see: MODE6:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
2 - 194
Class of Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
9.
Enter the Night 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

You see: MODE7:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
10.
Enter the Midnight 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
Hold.

You see: MODE8:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
11.
Enter the Rest 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

You see: Enter Station#-
12.
Go to step 3 and enter another extension number.
- OR -
Press the Speaker key to hang up.
Class of Service
2 - 195

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 196
Class of Service

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Clock/Calendar Display
Description
The system uses Clock/Calendar Display for:
J
Central Office Calls (Access Maps)
J
Station Message Detail Recording
J
Class of Service (Class)
J
System Reports
J
Direct Inward Lines
J
Toll Restriction (Class)
J
Display Telephones
J
Trunk Group Routing
J
Night Service (Automatic)
J
Voice Mail
J
Programmable Trunk Parameters
J
Voice Response System
J
Ring Groups
Using the Daylight Savings Setup program, you can determine whether the system should automatically
adjust the system time for daylight savings time/standard time changes.
Clock Adjustment
The system can be programmed to automatically adjust the system clock on a nightly basis. This feature
allows you to make adjustments should the system cabinet regularly lose or gain time.
Conditions
The system retains the Clock/Calendar Display after a power failure or system reset.
Changing the time may change the current Class Of Service (COS) service depending on
the COS mode setup.
You can program the system to automatically switch modes.
Single line telephones cannot set the time and date.
Changing the system time automatically changes the In-Mail time.
Default Setting
Enabled
Clock/Calendar Display
2 - 197

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with a display
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Class of Service
Night Service
Single Line Telephones
In-Mail
Programming
10-01-01
Time and Date - Year
Enter two digits (00~99) for the year .
10-01-02
Time and Date - Month
Enter two digits (01~12) for the month.
10-01-03
Time and Date - Day
Enter two digits (01~31) for the day.
10-01-04
Time and Date - Week
Enter the digit (1 = Sunday, 7 = Saturday) to indicate the day of the week.
10-01-05
Time and Date - Hour
Enter two digits (00~23) for the hour.
10-01-06
Time and Date - Minute
Enter two digits (00~59) for the minutes.
2 - 198
Clock/Calendar Display

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
10-01-07
Time and Date - Second
Enter two digits (00~59) for the seconds.
10-24-01
Daylight Savings Setup - Daylight Savings Mode
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system's ability to adjust the time for daylight savings/standard time.
10-24-02
Daylight Savings Setup - Time for Daylight Savings
Enter the time of day the system should adjust for daylight savings time (0000~2359).
10-24-03
Daylight Savings Setup - Start of Month (Summer Time)
Enter the month of system should adjust the time for daylight savings time (01~12).
10-24-04
Daylight Savings Setup - Start of Week
Enter the week of the month the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time
(0 = last week of the month or 1~5).
10-24-05
Daylight Savings Setup - Start of Week Day
Enter the day of the week the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).
10-24-06
Daylight Savings Setup - End of Month
Enter the month of system should adjust the time for standard time (01~12).
10-24-07
Daylight Savings Setup - End of Week
Enter the week of the month the system should adjust the time for standard time (0 = Last Week
of the Month or 1~5).
10-24-08
Daylight Savings Setup - End of Week Day
Enter the day of the week the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).
20-02-07
System Options for Multiline Telephones - Time and Date Display Mode
Select the display mode (type 1~8) for Time and Date (i.e., time and date format).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-07-03
Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Time
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to set the
Time.
Clock/Calendar Display
2 - 199

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
99-01-16
System Clock Adjustment
If for any reason the system clock loses or gains time, the system is able to automatically adjust
the system clock every midnight using this program.
This program is only available through telephone programming.
No other programs in 99-01-xx should be adjusted. Leave all other entries at their default setting. This
program is only available through telephone programming.
0 = No adjustment (default)
1~127 = seconds to be added to clock
128~255 = seconds to be backed up on the clock (-128 to -1 seconds)
Operation
The date must be set in system programming (10-01).
To set the system Time:
1.
Press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial 728.
3.
Dial two digits for the hour (24 hour clock, 13 = 1:00 PM).
4.
Dial two digits for the minutes (00~59).
5.
Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 200
Clock/Calendar Display

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
CO Message Waiting Indication
Description
This feature provides a Message Waiting indication when Voice Mail from the Central Office is used. The
CO provides this feature using Visual Message Waiting Indication (VMWI) standards. Visual Message
Waiting Indication visually indicates to a user that a message is present in their voice mail box. When
VMWI is provided, the Electra Elite IPK II provides a flashing LED on a line key assigned with the trunk
appearance.
The VMWI standard supported by the Electra Elite IPK IIincludes:
J
Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the MDMF protocol
J
Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the SDMF protocol
Conditions
When a new message is stored in the CO Voice Mail system, the LED flashes green (0.5
sec ON, 0.5 sec OFF) on the Direct Trunk Appearance line key at stations assigned for this
feature.
When the Direct Trunk Appearance line key is used by other ports during green blink
(flutter), the line key becomes in use and LED is turned on red.
When the station is using a DTH-16LD-( ) telephone, <> flashes on the LCD of a Direct
Trunk appearance line key to indicate a new message is stored in the CO voice mail
system.
A local Voice Mail system and this feature can be supported in the same system.
When power outage or some other reason causes the Central Office - Message Waiting
Indication (CO-MWI) to be out of synchronization with the system, an Attendant Position
can clear the CO-MWI per CO line.
The CO-MWI Callback Speed Dial number uses System Speed Dial Area.
This feature is supported at Multiline Terminals and DSS Consoles assigned with a direct
line key appearance of the CO/PBX line key supporting this feature and with proper Class
of Service assignment.
When additional digits (e.g., for password) are included in the CO Message Waiting
Indication System Speed Dial buffer, they must be separated by pauses to allow for
connection to the CO Voice Mail system.
A Single Line Telephone or DECT Wireless Handsets cannot indicate the CO-MWI.
The Message Display Board does not support the CO-MWI.
CO Message Waiting Indication
2 - 201

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
COIB (4)/(8)-U30 ETU
Related Features
Battery Backup System Power
Digital Voice Mail
Message Waiting
Speed Dial System/Group/Station
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Programming
15-17-01
CO-Message Waiting Indication LED Flash Assignment
Assign the Station and Trunk used for CO ñ Message Waiting Indication (default = Not
Assigned), Off = 0, On = 1.
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) for the appropriate extensions using the CO Message waiting.
2 - 202
CO Message Waiting Indication

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
20-07-23
Class of Service Option (Administrator Level) CO Message
Waiting Indication Call Back Number Programming 0= Off, 1 = On (default = 0)
Allows the following operations:
H
Forced LED Clear (Feature + 20)
H
MWI Callback number assignment (Feature + 28)
H
Edit Callback number digits (Feature + 29)
21-22-01
CO Message Waiting Indication Call Back Settings - CO
MWI Call Back Enabling
0 = Disable (VMWI Service), 1 = Enable (VMWI Service)
21-22-02
CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings CO- MWI Call Back Number Area
Setting
Set the Trunk port number ### to the System Speed Dial Bin No [0000-1999] (default = 1999).
20-02-08
System Options for Multiline Telephones LCD Display Holding Time
This timer determines how long a user' display will show Caller ID for a second incoming call.
(default = 5 sec)
Operation
To program the CO Message Waiting Callback Speed Dial Bin from an Attendant Position:
1.
Press the Feature key.
2.
Dial 28.
3.
Press the CO line.
4.
Dial Speed Dial bin (default = 1999).

The valid range is 0000~1999 and depends on system programming.
5.
Press the Feature key.
To program the Central Office - Message Waiting Indication callback number from an Attendant
Position:
1.
Press the Feature key.
2.
Dial 29.
3.
Press the CO line.
4.
Dial the Central Office -Message Waiting Indication callback number.

The Exit key is used to clear all digits.
CO Message Waiting Indication
2 - 203

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
5.
Press the Feature key.

This operation updates data in PRG 13-04-01, a user can also edit the dial digits in PRG 13-04-01 from handset-
programming or PCPro / WebPro.
To retrieve a Central Office - Message Waiting Indication:
1.
Press the Feature key.
2.
Dial 27.
3.
Press the CO line key.

The LCD will indicate `ERROR' if the CO Line is not flashing for a CO Message Waiting.
4.
Listen to the message.

The operation for deletion is based on the remote voice mail system.
5.
Hang up.
To clear the Central Office - Message Waiting Indication from an Attendant Position:
1.
Press the Feature key.
2.
Dial 20.
3.
Press the CO line key.
2 - 204
CO Message Waiting Indication

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Code Restriction
Description
Code Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place only
certain types of calls, you can better control long distance costs. The system applies Code Restriction
according to an extension's Code Restriction Class. The system allows for up to 15 Code Restriction
Classes and 416 extensions.
Conditions
If a Code Restriction Class has the same entries in both a permit and restriction table, the
system does not restrict the call.
Code Call Digit counting may prevent users from taking advantage of long distance
automated services like ACD and automated Technical Service.
Code Restriction is applied when accessing ARS.
If Program 21-01-10 is programmed with an entry other than "0", a call will not have a talk
path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing
an out going call. This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program will cause a
problem when dialing 911. Since it is only a 3-digit number, the call will not have a talk path,
preventing the emergency dispatcher from hearing the caller. It is recommended that this
option be kept at its default setting of "0" to prevent any problems with dialing 911.
Common Permit Code Table
Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Code
Restriction Classes to dial. To let all users dial 911, for example, put 911 in the Common
Permit Code Table. The Common Permit Code Table overrides the Restrict Code and
Common Restrict Code Tables. The system provides 10 tables, with 10 entries in each
table. Each code is 4 digits maximum, using 0~9, #, and the Recall key (as a wild card).
Common Restrict Code Table
The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Code
Restriction Classes. To prevent all users from dialing directory assistance (411), for
example, put 411 in the Common Restrict Code Table. Be sure you do not allow the codes
you want to restrict in the Permit Code Table or the Common Permit Code Table. The
system provides 10 tables, with 10 entries in each table. Each code is four digits maximum,
using 0~9, #, and the Recall key (as a wild card).
Code Restriction
2 - 205

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Restrict Code Table
When you want Code Restriction to allow most calls and restrict only selected calls, use the
Restrict Code Table. To block only 1-900 calls, for example, enter 1900 in the Restrict Code
Table. (If the same Code Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the
system restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both
tables are not restricted.) The system provides four tables, with 60 entries (restricted codes)
in each table. A restricted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0~9, #, and the Recall key
(as a wild card).
Permit Code Table
The Permit Code Table lets you set up Code Restriction so that users can dial only selected
(permitted) telephone numbers. Use this table when you want to restrict most calls. To
allow all users to dial only area code 203, for example, enter 1203 in the Permit Code
Table. 1 + 203 + NNX + nnnn are the only numbers users can dial. (If the same Code
Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the system restricts calls that
you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables are not restricted.)
The system provides four tables, with 200 entries (permitted codes) in each table. A
permitted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0-9, #, and the Recall key (as a wild card).
International Call Restriction
International Call Restriction lets you limit the international calls an extension user may dial.
You can build a restrict table to prevent only certain calls, or you can build a permit table to
allow only certain calls. To allow most international calls, use the International Call Restrict
Table. To prevent most international calls, use the International Call Allow Table. The
system provides 10 International Call Restrict tables with up to four digits in each table
entry and 20 International Call Allow tables, with up to six digits in each table entry. Valid
entries are 0~9, #, and the Recall key (for a wild card).
Code Restriction for Speed Dialing
Speed Dialing can bypass or follow Code Restriction. If you allow many users to program
Speed Dialing, consider code restricting the numbers they dial. If only administrators can
program Speed Dialing, Code Restriction may not be necessary. You can separately
restrict Group and Common Speed Dialing.
Toll Digit Counting
Use Call Digit Counting to limit the number of digits local callers can dial. You can use this
option to prevent users from accessing local dial-up services. For example, set the
Maximum Number of Digits in Local Calls to seven to limit local callers to dialing the
exchange code (NNX) and local address (nnnn) only. The system provides four tables in
which you can make entries for this option. The range is 4~30 digits.
Code Call Digit Counting
With Code Call Digit Counting, you can limit the number of digits long distance callers can
dial. This lets you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial-up
services. You can make four entries (4~30 digits).
2 - 206
Code Restriction

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Toll Free Trunks
Certain trunks can be completely unrestricted, such as the company president's Private
Line. Users can place calls on Code Free Trunks anytime to anywhere, without
inadvertently being Code restricted.
PBX Call Restriction
Code Restriction programming lets you enable/disable PBX Call Restriction and enter PBX
access codes. You only need to do this if your system is behind a PBX and you have trunks
programmed for behind PBX operation. Refer to PBX Compatibility feature for the
specifics.
Additional Default Entries For Common Permit Code Table
Additional entries have been added to the default Common Permit Code Table. The default
setting is as follows:
H Table 1: 911
H Table 4: 1822
H Table 7: 1855
H Table 2: 1800
H Table 5: 1833
H Table 8: 1866
H Table 3: 1888
H Table 6: 1844
H Table 9: 1877
Tie Line Code Restriction Enhanced
In 34-01-05 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup - System Code Restriction, if this option is set to '0', the
system will follow the setting in 21-05-13 : Code Restriction Class - Restriction of Tie Line Calls to
determine whether or not the Code restriction setting in Program 34-08 is to be followed. If
this option is set to '1', the system will follow the system Code restriction settings defined in
Program 21-05-01 through 21-05-13.
A user can temporarily override a extension's Code Restrictions.
The system will allow or deny outgoing access to trunks depending on Code Restriction.
If the system detects the call is answered by detecting reversal in an analog trunk this
restores both way voice paths immediately.
When using DISA or tie lines, additional programming is required for Code Restriction
(DISA, refer to Program 25-10; tie lines, refer to Program 34-04).
A user can temporarily block their extension's Code Restriction access, preventing
unwanted calls from being placed on their telephone while they are away from their desk.
Default Setting
Disabled
Code Restriction
2 - 207

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Code Restriction Override
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
PBX Compatibility
Tie Lines
Programming
14-01-08
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Toll Restriction
For each trunk, enter 1 to enable Toll Restriction; enter 0 to disable Code Restriction.
15-02-30
Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Select Toll Restriction Class VE or Real
Extension
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
For each extension, assign a Class of Service (1~15).
20-08-02
Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Trunk Calls
For each Class of Service, decide whether to enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to
place an outgoing trunk call.
2 - 208
Code Restriction

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
20-13-20
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert
When toll restriction is violated, determine if the operator should be notified.
Operator Alert:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
21-01-10
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Dial Digits for Toll Restriction Path
If this option is programmed with an entry other than "0", a call will not have a talk path unless
the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing an outgoing call.
This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program will cause a problem when dialing 911.
Since it is only a 3-digit number, the call will not have a talk path, preventing the emergency
dispatcher from hearing the caller. It is recommended that this option be kept at its default
setting of "0" to prevent any problems with dialing 911. If the system detects the call is
answered, by detecting Reversal in analog trunks, this restores both way voice paths
immediately.
21-01-15
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature.
21-01-16
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Supervise Dial Detection Timer
With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is not detected after the
extension answers an incoming line, the system determines the call is unable to complete and
releases the DTMF receiver (0~64800 seconds).
21-01-17
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Restriction Digit in Outgoing Disable on Incoming
Line
With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature, determine the number of digits (0~9) to be
dialed before the call should be disconnected.
21-04-01
Toll Restriction Class
For each extension, assign a Toll Restriction Class for each Night Service mode.
21-05-01
Toll Restriction Class - International Call Restriction Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the International Call Restrict
Table (Program 21-06-01).
21-05-02
Toll Restriction Class - International Call Permit Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the International Call Permit
Table (Program 21-06-02).
21-05-04
Toll Restriction Class - Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignments
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable (1) the dialing limit for calls. When
enabling, select from entries 1~4 in Program 21-06-03.
21-05-05
Toll Restriction Class - Common Permit Code Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the Common Permit Code
Table (Program 21-06-04).
Code Restriction
2 - 209

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
21-05-06
Toll Restriction Class - Common Restrict Code Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the Common Restrict Code
Table (Program 21-06-05).
21-05-07
Toll Restriction Class - Permit Code Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable (1) the Permit Code Table. When
enabling, select from tables 1~4 in Program 21-06-06.
21-05-08
Toll Restriction Class - Restrict Code Table
For the Code Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable (1) the Restrict Code Table.
When enabling, select from tables 1~4 in Program 21-06-07.
21-05-09
Toll Restriction Class - Restriction for Common Speed Dialing
For the Code Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Code Restriction for
Common Speed Dialing numbers.
21-05-10
Toll Restriction Class - Restriction for Group Speed Dialing Numbers
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Code Restriction for Group
Speed Dialing numbers.
21-05-11
Toll Restriction Class - Intercom Call Restriction
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Intercom Call Restriction. If
enabled, extensions cannot place or receive Intercom calls.
21-05-12
Toll Restriction Class - PBX Call Restriction
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) PBX Call Restriction.
21-05-13
Toll Restriction Class - Restriction of Tie Line Calls
Select whether or not the Toll Restriction set up in 34-08-01 is enabled (1) or disabled (0).
21-06-01
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - International Call Restrict Table
Enter the international dialing codes you want to restrict.
21-06-02
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - International Call Permit Table
Enter the international dialing codes you want to permit.
21-06-03
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment
Select the maximum number of digits allowed in outgoing calls for each table (4~30).
21-06-04
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Common Permit Code Table
Program codes into the Common Permit Code Table.
21-06-05
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Common Restrict Table
Program codes into the Common Restrict Code Table.
21-06-06
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Permit Code Table
Program codes into the Permit Code Tables.
2 - 210
Code Restriction

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
21-06-07
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Restrict Code Table
Program codes into the Restrict Code Tables (200 codes per table maximum).
21-06-08
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - PBX Access Codes
The system allows up to 4 tables for PBX access codes. PBX Access Codes can be up to 2
digits, using 0~9, #, and LINE KEY 1 (don't care). Refer to the PBX Compatibility feature for
the specifics.
21-21-01
Toll Restriction Class for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) - Restriction Class
Toll restriction class for trucks. For each truck, assign a Class restriction Class for each Day/
Night Service Mode.
34-01-05
E&M Tie Line Basic Setup - System Toll Restriction
Enable (1) or disable (0) the ability for tie line calls to follow the system Toll Restriction entries in
Programs 21-05-01 through 21-05-13. If disabled, Tie Line Code Restriction will be determined
by 21-05-13.
34-08-01
Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines
Define the Toll Restriction data for E&M tie lines. This data should be defined if Tie Line Code
Restriction is enabled in Program 21-05-13.
Operation
To place a trunk call if your system is Code Restricted:
1.
Place call normally.

If your Code Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial, your call will be cut off.
Code Restriction
2 - 211

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 212
Code Restriction

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Description
Code Restriction-Dial Block lets a user temporarily block an extension's Code Restriction. This helps a
user block his or her phone from being used by another person while they are away from their desk. A
user would need to enter a 4-digit personal code to enable/disable this feature.
Dial Block can also be set by the supervisor's access code. If Dial Block has already been set by an
extension user, the supervisor can not release it. Additionally, if Dial Block has been set by the
supervisor code, the extension user can not release it.
Important: This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an
assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a
supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.
Conditions
If the system is reset by a first initialize, the Dial Block feature is cleared.
This feature is not available for ISDN S-Bus extensions.
Both Programs 21-09-01 (Code Restrict Class) and 21-10 (Dial Block Restriction Class per
Extension) can be set at the same time.
The system gives priority to the setting in Program 20-10.
Dial Block can temporarily block an extension's Code Restriction setting by changing to a
pre defined table that has more restrictions.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals:
None
Code Restriction, Dial Block
2 - 213

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Required Component(s):
None
Related Features
None
Programming
11-10-17
Service Code Setup (for System Administration) Dial Block by Supervisor
Assign a service code (601 by default) to be used by the supervisor to set Dial Block for another
extension.
11-11-33
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) Dial Block
Assign a service code (600 by default) to be used for Dial Block.
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a COS to each extension (1~15).
20-08-08
Code Restriction Dial Block
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use Dial Block.
21-09-01
Dial Block Setup Code Restriction Class with Dial Block
Assign a Code Restriction COS (1~15) when the Dial Block feature is used.
21-09-02
Dial Block Setup Supervisor Password
Assign a 4-digit password to be used by the supervisor to enable or disable Dial Block for other
extensions.
21-10-01
Dial Block restriction Class per Extension
Assign the Code Restriction COS (1-15) to be used by an extension when the Dial Block feature
is enabled. If this data is "0", Code Restriction COS follows PGM 21-09-01.
90-19-01
Dial Block Release
Enter the extension number to be released from the Dial Block Restriction. This program can be
used when a password is forgotten by the user.
2 - 214
Code Restriction, Dial Block

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Operation
To set Dial Block:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 600 (default).
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block Code (user defined).
4.
Dial 1.

Confirmation tone is heard.
5.
Press the Speaker key or replace the handset to hang up.
To release Dial Block:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 600.
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4.
Dial 0.

Confirmation tone is heard.
5.
Press the Speaker key or replace the handset to hang up.
To set Dial Block from another extension:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 601 (default).
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code (as set in programming).
4.
Dial the extension number to blocked.
5.
Dial 1.

Confirmation tone is heard.
6.
Press the Speaker key or replace the handset to hang up.
Code Restriction, Dial Block
2 - 215

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
To release Dial Block from another extension:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 601.
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4.
Dial the extension number to be released from Dial Block.
5.
Dial 0.

Confirmation tone is heard.
6.
Press the Speaker key or replace the handset to hang up.
2 - 216
Code Restriction, Dial Block

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Code Restriction Override
Description
Code Restriction Override lets a user temporarily bypass an extension's Code Restriction. This helps a
user that must place an important call that Code Restriction normally prevents. For example, you could
set up Code Restriction to block 900 calls and then provide a Code Restriction Override code to your
attendant and executives. When the attendant or executive needs to place a 900 call, they just:
J
Press the Speaker key, dial a service code and enter their override code.
J
Press the Speaker key and dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9 or #9 002).
J
Place the 900 call without restriction.
You can assign a different Code Restriction Override code to each extension. Or, extensions can share
the same override code.
Code Restriction Override will override all Code Restriction programming. Walking Code Restriction
allows you to assign a Code Restriction level for each user. When a call is placed using Walking Code
Restriction, the restriction for the call is based on the Code Restriction level defined in Programs 21-05-
xx and 21-06-xx.
Conditions
Off-Premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines.
In the Class heading in the SMDR report, POTA indicates that the call was placed using
Code Restriction Override.
Code Restriction Override and Walking Code Restriction temporarily overrides an
extension's Code Restriction.
If the system has VRS, users hear, "Your call cannot go through. Please call the operator"
when they dial a number that Code Restriction prevents.
Default Setting
Disabled
Code Restriction Override
2 - 217

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Code Restriction
Station Message Detail Recording
Voice Response System (VRS)
2 - 218
Code Restriction Override

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Programming
Walking Code Restriction
Start
Should the Walking
In Program 11-11-36,
Toll Restriction service
change the service code
code be changed from
Yes
to the desired entry.
the default setting of
663?
No
In Program 21-14-01, assign a table with the
6-digit user ID dialed to override the Toll
Restriction.
In Program 21-14-02, for each table, assign the
Toll Restriction Class of Service to be used
when a user dials the 6-digit ID assigned in
21-14-01.
Stop
Code Restriction Override
2 - 219

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II

Temporary Code Restriction Override
Start
Should a user be able
to temporarily override
Program 20-08-06,
No
Toll Restriction
Program 20-08-06,
Yes
enter 0.
Programming?
enter 1.
In Program 20-06-01, assign Class
of Service to extensions.
Should the Temporary
Toll Restriction
In 11-11-34, change the
Override service code
Yes
service code to the
be changed from the
desired entry.
default setting of 775?
No
In Program 21-07-01, for each extension
number, set the 4-digit password a user dials
to override the Toll Restriction.
In Program 21-01-07, determine how long the system should
remove Toll Restriction from the extension.
Stop
2 - 220
Code Restriction Override

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Programming
11-11-34
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Temporary Toll Restriction Override
If required, change the service code (775) for Temporary Toll Restriction Override.
11-11-36
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Walking Toll Restriction
If required, change the service code (663) for Toll Restriction Override.
20-08-06
Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Toll Restriction Override
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use Temporary Toll
Restriction Override.
21-01-07
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Toll Restriction Override Time
Set the Toll Restriction Override Time (0~64800 seconds). After dialing the Toll Restriction
Override codes, the system removes Toll Restriction for this interval.
21-07-01
Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Assign Toll Restriction Override codes to extensions. Each code must be 4 digits long, using any
combination of 0~9, # and . Each extension can have a separate code, or many extensions
can share the same override code.
21-14-01
Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup - User ID
Enter the Walking Toll Restriction Override User ID codes (6 digits) into tables. Up to 500
different override codes can be entered.
21-14-02
Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup - Walking Toll Restriction Class Number
Enter the Walking Toll Restriction Class of Service (1~15) to be used for each table number
assigned in 21-14-01.
35-02-01
through
35-02-18
SMDR Output Options
Assign the output condition for the printer or PC. If the data is set to "1" (output), the symbol of
the call will print as "POTA" and the password table number will be printed as "W/@@@" (@@
equals the 3 digit table number) in the Account Code area.
Code Restriction Override
2 - 221

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Operation
To temporarily override a restricted extension's Code Restriction:
You can override restriction for only one call at a time.
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
At single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 775.
3.
Dial the 4-digit Code Restriction Override code.

If you wait too long before going to the next step, you may have to repeat the procedure. After dialing the service
code, the display will indicate the override codes as they are being entered. As the last digit is entered, the
display is cleared and ICM dial tone is heard.

You will hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly.
4.
Press idle line key or dial trunk access code.
5.
Dial the number without any restriction.
To use your Walking Code Restriction level at an extension:
You can override restriction for only one call at a time.
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 663 and dial the 6-digit Walking Toll Restriction Class of Service code.

After dialing the service code, the display will indicate the override codes as they are being entered. As the last
digit is entered, the display is cleared and ICM dial tone is heard.

You will hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly.
3.
Press idle line key or dial trunk access code.
4.
Dial the number.

The call is allowed or denied based on the user's Toll Restriction Class of Service level.
2 - 222
Code Restriction Override

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications
Description
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) applications automate your office with TAPI compatibility and
external PC control. CTI puts your telephone system on the cutting edge of modern office productivity
with:
Personal Computer Interface (PCI) / PC Dialing
Use a CTA or CTU Adapter installed in your multiline terminal as a Personal Computer Interface.
Installing the TAPI software driver and TAPI compatible software in your personal computer will allow
your PC to operate your telephone. The TAPI software driver provides all TAPI Basic Services and a
host of TAPI Supplemental Services. See "TAPI Compatibility" for more.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
None
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications
2 - 223

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
TAPI Compatibility
See this feature for the details on TAPI services provided by the system and the TAPI driver.
Programming
Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II System Hardware Manual for details on connecting the CTA and CTU
Adapters.
Operation
None
2 - 224
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conference
Description
Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation. With
Conference, a user may set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. The CPUII
provides 64 Conference circuits, allowing any number of internal or external parties to be conferenced
together up to a limit of 32. This means that one extension can conference up to 31 internal and/or
external parties together (the originator would be the 32nd party reaching the maximum of 32). While
this Conference call is active, another user can use initiate a separate Conference also up to the limit of
32 parties, or any number a conferences can be initiated with any number of parties (up to 32) until all 64
conference circuits are all busy.
Conditions
Each block assigned in Program 10-07 for Conversation Recording reduces the number of
blocks available for ADA Recording, ACD Agent Auto Call Recording, and ACD Supervisor
Monitor.
An ADA module is required for speech recording.
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys (virtual extensions) do not support Conference Programmable
Function keys nor can they be used to add a call to a Conference.
Split allows a user to alternate (i.e., switch) between their callers in Conference. This will
allow a dispatcher, for example, to control a telephone meeting between themselves, a
customer and a service technician. The dispatcher can meet together with all parties,
privately set up a service strategy with the technician and then meet again to set the
schedule.
Split cycles through the Conference in the same order in which the Conference was initially
set up. If a user places an outside call, conferences extension 101 followed by extension
102, Split will cycle from the trunk, to 101 and finally to 102. The Split cycle then repeats.
If a user's extension has Barge In capability enabled, they can also Barge In on an
established Conference. This permits, for example, an attendant or supervisor to join a
Conference in an emergency. It also allows a co-worker to leave a conference and then
rejoin the telephone meeting when it is convenient to do so.
A Class of Service option is available which will allow or deny an extension user from
automatically setting up a Conference/Tandem Trunking call upon hanging up the
telephone.
Conference
2 - 225

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
An extension with Barge In capability can Transfer a call into an existing Conference. This
would allow, for example, an attendant to locate co-workers and then Transfer them into an
existing telephone meeting. There is no need for the attendant to locate all the parties at the
same time and sequentially add them into the Conference. Transfer Call Into Conference
Code (624).
An option is available which allows an extension's Conf key to be programmed for
Conference or for Transfer. When set for Transfer, the user places a call on hold, dials the
extension to which it should be transferred, the presses the Conf key. The call is then
transferred. When set for Conference, with an active call, the user presses the Conf key,
places a second call, then presses the Conf key twice. All the calls are then connected.
Users can Barge In on a Conference call if allowed in programming.
Define the outgoing call options for each trunk and user.
Set up a Conference with a co-worker in your immediate work area.
DISA and tie line users may use the Barge In feature on a Conference call if they know the
service code and are permitted in their DISA/Tie Line Class of Service.
Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging.
Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two-party meeting via Paging.
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys (virtual extensions) do not support Conference Programmable
Function keys nor can they be used to add a call to a conference.
In order for Multiline Terminal to have Conference, it must have a Conference function key.
A user can set up an Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Conference and then drop out of the
call, allowing the remaining parties to continue the conversation. Establish 2 trunk calls
press the HOLD key and dial #8.
You can optionally program the Conf (Transfer) key for Transfer. In this case, the Multiline
Terminal must have a Conference function key. The system also allows a call to be
transferred into a Conference call.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
2 - 226
Conference

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Not applicable
Programming
10-07-01
Conversation Record Circuits
Determine if there are conference circuits available, that not all have been assigned as
conversation record circuits.
11-12-08
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Barge-In
If required, use this program to change the code users dial to Barge-In to a Conference call. This
code is normally 710.
11-12-47
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Call Waiting Answer / Split Answer for SLT
If required, use this program to change the code users dial to Split while on a Conference call.
This code is normally 794.
11-12-57
Unsupervised Conference/Tandem Trunking
With two trunks in Conference press the Hold key and dial #8 and the Conference/Tandem
happens.
11-12-58
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Transfer Into Conference
If required, change the service code used to transfer a call into a Conference call (default: 624).
11-16-02
Program 11-16 : One-Digit Service Code Setup - Barge-In
If required, use this program to define the single digit service code users dial to Barge-In to a
Conference call.
14-01-04
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls
CODEC gain set at 0 dB (14-01-04 = 32) can be used to set the CODEC gain type for multiline
Conference calls.
15-02-24
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup, Conference Key Mode
This option allows an extension's Conf key to be programmed for Conference or for Transfer.
When set for Transfer (1), the user places a call on hold, dials the extension to which it should be
transferred, the presses the Conf key. The call is then transferred. When set for Conference (0),
with an active call, the user presses the Conf key, places a second call, then presses the Conf
key twice. All the calls are then connected.
Conference
2 - 227

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Conference (code 07) and Barge in Code (34).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-11-21
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Restriction for Tandem Trunking on
Hang Up
Allow (0) or deny (1) an extension user's ability to set up a tandem call automatically when they
hang up. By default, this option is allowed (0).
20-13-08
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Conference
In an extension's COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to initiate a Conference.
20-13-10
Barge In Mode per COS
20-13-15
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge-In Initiate
In an extension's COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to Barge-In to a call.
20-13-16
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge-In Receive
In an extension's COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension's ability to receive a Barge-In on a
call.
20-14-11
Class of Service Options For DISA/E&M - DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In
Determine if DISA and tie trunk users should have the ability to dial a service code to Barge-In to
a Conference call (0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled).
Operation
To establish a Conference:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Establish intercom or trunk call.
2.
Press the Conf key or Conf softkey (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 07).
3.
Dial the extension you want to add.
- OR -
Access outside call
- OR -
Retrieve call from Park orbit.

To get the outside call, you can either press a line key or press the Speaker key and dial 9, the Trunk Access Code
+ the trunk number (default #9). You can optionally go back to step 2 to add more parties to your Conference.
4.
When called party answers, press the Conf softkey or the Conf key twice.
2 - 228
Conference

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1

If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the system's Conference limit.

If the call being added is busy/unanswered:
With an outside call, press the line or Call Appearance (CAP) key for a call previously added to the Conference.
The unanswered call will drop and the initiator will be back into the Conference call.

Adding an Intercom call to an outside Conference call: Press the Conf softkey on the Multiline Terminal display
or the Conf key twice to re-establish the Conference. If using a non-display telephone, press the Conf key twice.

With only Intercom calls in the Conference: Press the Conf key twice to re-establish the Conference. If the voice
mail answers, there is no way to drop that extension out. You will need to drop the Conference call.
5.
Repeat steps 2~4 to add more parties.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Establish Intercom or trunk call.
2.
Hookflash and dial #1.
3.
Dial extension you want to add.
- OR -
Access trunk call.
- OR -
Retrieve call from Park orbit.
4.
Hookflash and repeat step 3 to add more parties.
- OR -
Hookflash twice to set up the Conference.
To Split (alternate) between the parties in Conference:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press Conf (Transfer) or Conference key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 07).
2.
Dial Split service code (794).

Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Press the Conf softkey or the
press the Conf key twice to set up the Conference again.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Hookflash and dial 794.

Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Hookflash twice to set up the
Conference again.
Conference
2 - 229

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
To drop an outside call from the Conference:
1.
Press the Hold key to place the conference call on hold.
2.
Hang up.

The lines involved in the Conference will ring back separately to the telephone.
3.
Answer and disconnect the unwanted outside call.
4.
To re-establish the Conference, answer the remaining call by pressing the Conf key after each call
is answered. Press the Conf key twice when all calls have been answered.
To exit a Conference without affecting the other parties:
Multiline Terminal
5.
Hang up.

If you press Hold while on a call with two outside callers, the outside callers hear what is programmed in
10-04-01.
Single Line Telephone
6.
Hang up.

If you are not permitted to use Tandem Trunking, outside callers may hear Music on Hold.
To Barge-In to Conference Call:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker and dial the service code (default = 710).

If the telephone does not have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user hangs up, the system will
automatically place a Callback to the extension.
2.
Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a Conference call.

When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the Conference,
depending on system programming, and all display multiline terminals show the joined party. If a Conference is
not possible:
Q
the extension user will hear a warning tone
Q
the DISA user will be rerouted to the defined ring group
- OR -
Q
the tie line user will hear a busy tone.
- OR -
The following steps are not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks:
1.
Dial the extension number of the internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code, if programmed.

Instead of the single digit service code, the service code 710 can also be dialed at this point.
2 - 230
Conference

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
To Transfer a Call into a Conference:
1.
While on a call, press the Hold key.
2.
Dial the Transfer to Conference service code (default = 624).

If the telephone does not have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user hangs up, the system will
automatically place a Callback to the extension.

The display shows the line Number, Number/Name and Extension Name/Number.
3.
Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a Conference call.

If an error tone is heard, Barge-In is not enabled for the extension and the call will not go through. Retrieve the
call by pressing the flashing line or Call Appearance (CAP) Key or hang up and the call will recall the extension.

When the call is transferred into the Conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the conference,
depending on the entries in Program 20-13-17 and Program 80-01, and all display multiline terminals will show
the joined party.

To cancel the transfer, press the flashing line or Call Appearance (CAP) Key to retrieve the call.
4.
Hang up.
Break Up the Conference But Retain the Trunk Calls:
1.
While on an active Conference call, press Hold.
2.
Select the line or Call Appearance (CAP) Key of the caller you wish to talk to.

Any intercom calls which were involved in the Conference will be disconnected.
Dropping a Party From the Conference:
1.
While on an active Conference call, press the line/Call Appearance (CAP) Key of the party to
retain. This action will retain any intercom calls involved in the Conference.
Conference
2 - 231

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 232
Conference

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Description
Voice Call Conference lets extension user's in the same work area join in a trunk Conference. To initiate
a Voice Call Conference, an extension user just presses the Meet-Me Conference key and tells their co-
workers to join the call. The system releases the privacy on the trunk, and other users can just press the
trunk's line key to join the call. Line keys assigned for the trunk will blink indicating that privacy has been
released, and others can join the current call.
Voice Call Conference does not use the telephone system features to announce the call. The person
initiating the Voice Call Conference just announces it verbally. A tone, indicating others have joined the
conference, can be provided.
CPUII provides 2 blocks of 32 conference circuits, allowing each block to have any number conferences
with any number of internal or external parties conferenced as long as the total number of conference
channels used does not exceed the block's limit of 32.
Privacy Mode Toggle Option
The Privacy Mode Toggle option allows an extension user to quickly change an outside call from the
non-private mode to the private mode. If the outside call is on a line key, the user just presses the line
key to switch from non-private mode to private mode. For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle
option, trunks initially have the privacy released. The remainder of the call will be private. If the call is on
a Call Appearance (CAP) Key, the user presses their Meet-Me Conference function key instead. Unlike
pressing the line key, pressing the Meet-Me Conference key toggles back and forth between private and
non-private mode for the call.
Conditions
Each block assigned in Program 10-07 for Conversation Recording reduces the number of
blocks available for Conference.
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys and Virtual Extensions do not support Voice Call Conference
Programmable Function keys.
Voice Call Conference requires a Meet-Me Conference function key and trunk line keys.
This feature is not available at single line telephones.
With Caller ID enabled, a call with Privacy Release will show the Caller ID until the call is
answered. It can be viewed again by pressing the line key, though this sets the call to
Private mode. To keep the call on Privacy Release, press the Help + Exit keys.
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
2 - 233

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Caller ID
Conference
Programmable Function Keys
Programming
10-07-01
Conversation Record Circuits
Determine if there are conference circuits available and that not all have been assigned as
conversation record circuits.
14-01-19
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Privacy Mode Toggle Option
Determine if a trunk should be able to be toggled to a private/non-private line (0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled). This option is not required for Voice Call Conference.
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for the users to set up Voice Call Conference (code 32) and line keys (,01
+ trunk number) on the telephones of the invited co-workers. (Trunks: 1~200)
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
2 - 234
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
20-13-09
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Privacy Release
In an extension's COS, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use Privacy Release
allowing for a Voice Call Conference. The trunk must be programmed to allow this feature in
Program 14-01-19.
20-13-17
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Barge-In Tone/Display
In an extension's COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the tone the user hears when the Voice Call
Conference feature is used. People on the call will not hear the barge-in tone if disabled (the
person intruding will hear a beep when barging in). If enabled, both extension users and the
outside caller hear the tone. (Note that this option is also used for Barge-In.)
31-01-04
System Options for Internal/External Paging - Privacy Release Time
Set the interval users have to join a Voice Call Conference after it is announced. (Note that this
interval is also used for Meet Me Conference.)
Operation
To join a Voice Call Conference (if invited):
1.
After Conference request, press indicated line key.

A "Conf" indication is displayed on both telephones.

A trunk with privacy release or Voice Call Conference will blink.
To exit a Voice Call Conference without affecting the other parties:
1.
Press Speaker to hang up.
To toggle between Private and Non-Private mode:
1.
Press the Meet-Me Conference key (PGM 15-07-01, SC 751: 32).
- OR -
Press the Trunk Line Key. (This will toggle from Non-Private to Private. To go back to Non-Private,
the Meet-Me Conference Key above must be pressed.)
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
2 - 235

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 236
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Continued Dialing
Description
Continued Dialing allows an extension user to dial a call, wait for the called party to answer and then dial
additional digits. This helps users that need services like Voice Mail, automatic banking and Other
Common Carriers (OCCs).
There are two types of Continued Dialing:
Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls
Depending on an extension's Class of Service, a multiline terminal user may be able to dial additional
digits after their Intercom call connects. In systems with Voice Mail, for example, Continued Dialing lets
extension users dial the different options after the Voice Mail answers. Without Continued Dialing,
extension users cannot access these Voice Mail options.
Continued Dialing for Trunk Calls
Continued Dialing gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking, an outside Automated
Attendant, bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers (OCCs). After the outside service answers, the
user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow. Without Continued Dialing, the system's Toll
Restriction will cut off the call after a specific number of dialed digits. See Programming below for
additional information.
NOTICE
Continued Dialing may make the system more susceptible to toll fraud.
Conditions
The ability to use Continued Dialing on trunk calls is set by Toll Restriction programming.
Continued Dialing for intercom calls only applies to calls made to analog type devices.
With Pulse to Tone Conversion, users can place calls to services over Dial Pulse trunks -
and then dial DTMF digits after the service answers.
Default Setting
Enabled
Continued Dialing
2 - 237

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Toll Restriction
Programming
15-03-03
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Terminal Type
Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after the initial call setup. For Voice Mail, always
enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-13-13
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Continued Dialing
In an extension's Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Continued Dialing for Intercom calls to 2500 type devices.
21-04-01
Toll Restriction Class
Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1~15) to an extension.
21-05-04
Toll Restriction Class - Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment
Assign a Maximum Number of Digits Table to each Toll Restriction Class.
21-06-03
Toll Restriction - Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment
Set the Maximum Number of digits dialed for each table.
2 - 238
Continued Dialing

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Operation
To use Continued Dialing:
1.
Place Intercom or trunk call.
2.
Continue dialing after call connects.

Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing.
Continued Dialing
2 - 239

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 240
Continued Dialing

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Cordless Telephone Connection
Description
Using an AP(R)/AP(A)-R Unit for a DTH/DTR telephone, or an APR/APA-U Unit for a DTU/DTP
telephone, a cordless telephone (2500-type) can be connected to a Multiline Terminal.
The SLI(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU and the SLT(1)-U( ) ADP also supports cordless telephones, but this feature
refers to Multiline Terminal cordless connection.
Conditions
A voice announced internal call to the Multiline Terminal does not ring the cordless
telephone.
Only one cordless Single Line Telephone can be connected to an APR-U, APA-U, AP(R)-R,
or AP(A)-R Unit.
When CO Prime Line is assigned to the associated Multiline Terminal, internal dial tone
cannot be transferred to the cordless telephone.
The cordless telephone requires a PBR circuit while dialing. When all PBR circuits are
busy, a busy tone is heard when the phone goes off-hook.
Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used without
interference varies.
This feature works with 2500-type cordless Single Line Telephones.
The Multiline Terminal user and the associated cordless telephone user cannot talk to each
other.
An AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, APA-U, or APR-U Unit with hookflash enabled follows the same
operating procedures as a Single Line Terminal connected to an SLI(8)-U( ) ETU.
The Multiline Terminal LCD displays normal information for Multiline Terminal when a
cordless terminal is used.
When the Multiline Terminal user goes off-hook before the cordless Single Line Telephone
user, a PBR circuit is not connected for the cordless Single Line Telephone.
The ring pattern for the cordless telephone can be selected by a jumper switch in the
AP(R)-R or APR-U Units. The patterns are:
J
1 second ON/2 seconds OFF
J
2 seconds ON/4 seconds OFF
The cordless telephone must be installed within 10 feet of the AP(R)-R Unit or APR-U Unit.
Cordless Telephone Connection
2 - 241

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default Setting
Not applicable
System Availability
Terminals
Any DTH/DTR terminal with an AP(A)-R or AP(R)-R Unit except the DTR-2DT-1 TEL
Any DTU/DTP terminal with an APA-U or APR-U Unit except the DTP-2ST-1 TEL
Required Component(s)
2500-type cordless Single Line Telephone
Related Features
Ancillary Device Connection
Programming
20-07
Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)
20-08~14
Class of Service Options
Operation
To make a call using a cordless Single Line Telephone:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial the station number or dial the Trunk Access Code and telephone number.
2 - 242
Cordless Telephone Connection

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
To answer a call using a cordless single line telephone:
When the Multiline Terminal is ringing, the incoming call can be answered by the cordless single line
telephone user by going off-hook, when ringing line preference is assigned for the multiline terminal.
To transfer a call from a cordless Single Line Telephone to its associated multiline terminal:
1.
The multiline terminal user goes off-hook.
2.
The single line telephone user goes on-hook (at this time, the call is automatically connected to the
multiline terminal).
To transfer a call from a multiline terminal to its associated cordless single line telephone:
1.
The single line telephone user goes off-hook (at this time, the call is automatically connected to the
Single Line Telephone).
2.
The multiline terminal user goes on-hook.
To use Hookflash:
Refer to operation for Single Line Telephone Access.
Cordless Telephone Connection
2 - 243

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 244
Cordless Telephone Connection

Data Line Security
Description
Data Line Security protects any station port from receiving audible tones (such as Camp-On
or Override) and denies a station from barging in while busy to prevent disruption of data
transmission when using a modem or facsimile machine.
Conditions
When a multiline terminal and a single line telephone is assigned for Data Line
Security, Tone Override/Voice Override and Call Alert notification tone are not
heard over the speaker or the handset.
D
Data Line Security protects a station from Barge-in, even when Barge-In is
allowed in Class of Service.
When any multiline terminal or single line telephone calls a station with Data
Line Security, a constant busy tone is heard.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
Data Line Security
2 - 245

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Programming
20-09-07
Call Queuing
0 = Off
1 = On
20-13-05
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turn off or on an extension's ability to receive Off-Hook Signaling.
0 = Off
1 = On
20-13-06
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
Allows a busy extension to manually (0) or automatically (1) receive Off-Hook Signaling.
0 = Manually
1 = Automatically
20-13-35
Block Camp On
Turn off or on an extension's COS the ability to block caller from dialing # to camp on.
0 = Off
1 = On
Operation
None
2 - 246
Data Line Security

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Delayed Ringing
Description
Delayed Ringing allows programmed secondary answering positions to ring on incoming calls after a
programmed time. This feature applies to CO/PBX lines, Secondary Incoming Extensions, Virtual
Extensions, and Call Arrival Keys.
Conditions
An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset (depending on
programming).
Terminals must have a CAP or CO line appearance for a trunk call to be answered on the
telephone.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals:
All Terminals
Required Component(s):
None
Delayed Ringing
2 - 247

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Call Arrival Keys (CAR)
Central Office Calls, Answering
Secondary Incoming Extension
Virtual Extensions
Programming
14-07-01
Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets the access options for trunks. Ring Group
programming overrides Access Map programming.
Trunk Access Maps: 1~200
15-06-01
Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions.
Trunk Access Maps: 1~200
15-07-01
Function Keys
Assign CAR/SIE/VE function keys (code *03 + extension number) or CO function keys (Code
*01 + trunk port) on multiline terminals.
15-09-01
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Individually program an extension's Virtual Extension key(s) to either ring (1) or not ring (0).
15-11-01
Virtual Extension Delay Ring Assignment
Individually program an extension's Virtual Extension key(s) for Delayed Ringing (1) or
Immediate Ringing (0).
20-04-03
System Options for Virtual Extensions Delay Interval
CAR/SIE/VE set for Delayed Ringing (Program 15-11-01) ring the covering extension after this
interval.
22-01-04
System Options for Incoming Calls - DIL No Answer Time
If an incoming trunk call rings longer than this interval, it reroutes to the Ring Group set in
Program 22-08-01. (Default = 0 seconds)
22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk.
2 - 248
Delayed Ringing

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
22-08-01
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
If an incoming trunk call rings longer than the DIL No Answer Time (Program 22-01-04), it routes
to the destination you specify in this option. Determine if the destination should be a Ring Group,
In-Skin/External Voice Mail, or Central Voice Mail.
Ring Groups: 1~100
102 = In-Skin/External Voice Mail
103 = Centralized Voice Mail
Operation
To answer Delay Ringing calls:
1.
Go off-hook.
- OR -
Press the Answer key.
- OR -
Press the flashing key.

Either Trunk key or CAR/SIE/VE key.
To program a CAR/SIE/VE key on a phone:
1.
Press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial 752.
3.
Press the key you want to program.
4.
Dial 03.
5.
Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key.
6.
Press the Hold key once for Immediate Ring (skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring).
7.
Dial the mode number in which the key will ring.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
8.
Press the Hold key for a second time for Delayed Ring, or Skip to step 10.
Delayed Ringing
2 - 249

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
9.
Dial the mode number in which the key will delay ring.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
10.
Press the Speaker key.
2 - 250
Delayed Ringing

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Department Calling
Description
With Department Calling, an extension user can call an idle extension within a preprogrammed
Department Group (64 Department Groups available) by dialing the group's pilot number. For example,
this would let a caller dial the Sales department just by knowing the Sales department's pilot number.
The caller would not have to know any of the Sales department's extension numbers.
There are two types of routing available with Department Calling: Priority Routing and Circular Routing.
With Priority Routing, an incoming call routes to the highest priority extensions first. Lower priority
extensions ring only if all higher priority extensions are busy. With Circular Routing, each call rings a new
extension (with circular routing, a new call will ring the extension which has been idle the longest in the
group).
Overflow Routing
Department Calling also provides overflow routing for extensions within the group. If a user directly dials
a busy extension within a Department Group, the system can optionally route the call to the first
available group member. The system follows Program 22-15-01~07 for playing the periodic VRS
message.
User Log Out/Log In
An extension user can log out and log in to a Department Calling Group. By logging out, the user
removes their extension from the group. Once logged out, Department Calling bypasses their extension.
When they log back in, Department Calling routes to their extension normally. All users can dial a code
to log in or log out of their Department Calling Group. A multiline terminal can optionally have a function
key programmed to login/logout.
Enhanced Hunting
Department Calling is enhanced with expanded hunting capabilities. Hunting sets the conditions under
which calls to a Department Group pilot number will cycle through the members of the group. The
hunting choices are:
J
Busy
A call to the pilot number will hunt past only a busy group member to the first available extension.
J
Not Answered
A call to the pilot number will cycle through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The
call will continue to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. If the Department Group
has Priority Routing enabled, and the highest priority member is busy, the call will not hunt to the
next available extension.
Department Calling
2 - 251

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
J
Busy or Not Answered
A call to the pilot number will cycle through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The
call will continue to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up.
If all members of the Department Group are busy, an incoming or transferred call to the group's pilot
number will queue for an available member. Each group has a queue that can hold any number of
waiting calls. If a display telephone is waiting in queue, the user will see: WAITING (group name). If a
transferred call in queue is an outside call, and the system has DSP daughter board installed with the
VRS, the queued caller will hear, "Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a
line becomes free."
The VRS can also transfer calls to Department Groups. Refer to Voice Response System (VRS) on page
2-943 for information on setting up the VRS.
The system prevents hunting to a Department Group extension if it is:
J
Busy on a call
J
In Do Not Disturb
J
Call Forwarded
J
Logged Out
Conditions
When a DIL rings to a Department Group, the DIL may follow overflow programming
(Programs 22-01-04 and 22-08-01).
If all agents are logged out and an intercom call to the Department Group is made you will
get a busy signal.
Extensions within a Department Group which have Call Forwarding enabled will not be
included in the call hunt. The extension to which the user is forwarded will not receive the
hunted calls. When you use the automatic Department Step calling (16-01-03) it will only
hunt to members with the same or lower priority.
Easily step call to an idle Department Group member if the member called is busy.
A virtual extension can be programmed to receive multiple calls which can camp on to the
extension - no analog port is required.
An extension user can Transfer a call to a Department Group master number. If
unanswered, the call will recall (depending on programming) the transferring extension
after the Transfer Recall Time (Program 24-02-04).
Voice mail uses one Department Group for voice mail.
2 - 252
Department Calling

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Default Setting
Disabled
Priority Routing
IF
IF
IF
CALL
Telephone on a
Telephone on a
call
call
Priority 1
Priority 1
Priority 1
CALL
Telephone on a
call
Priority 2
Priority 2
Priority 2
CALL
Priority 3
Priority 3
Priority 3
Figure 2-1 Department Calling Priority Call Routing
Department Calling
2 - 253

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Circular Routing
CALL 1
CALL 2
CALL 3
CALL 4
Figure 2-2 Department Calling Circular Routing
2 - 254
Department Calling

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
VRS for Messaging
Related Features
Call Arrival Keys (CAR)
Call Forwarding
Department Step Calling
Transfer
Voice Mail
Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming
11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers
Assign pilot numbers to the Extension (Department) Groups you set up in Program
16-02-01~10.
11-11-25
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Automatic Transfer Setup for Each
Department Group
Use this option to set the service code (default = 602) to activate immediate automatic transfer
for ICM and transferred calls to Department Groups.
11-11-26
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Automatic Transfer Cancellation for
Each Department Group
Use this option to set the service code (default = 603) to deactivate immediate automatic
transfer for ICM and transferred calls to Department Groups.
Department Calling
2 - 255

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
11-11-27
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Destination of Automatic Transfer for
Each Department Group
Use this option to set the service code (default = 604) for setting the destination for immediate
automatic transfer for ICM and transferred calls to Department Groups.
11-11-28
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Delayed Transfer for Each Department
Group
Use this option to set the service code (default = 605) for setting the delayed transfer destination
Department Group.
11-11-29
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each
Department Group
Use this option to set the service code (default = 606) for cancelling the delayed transfer
destination Department Group.
11-12-09
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Changed to STG All Ring
Use this option to set the service code for ringing all members of a Department Group.
11-16-10
Single Digit Service Code Setup
Assign the Single Digit (post-dialing) Service Code for All Member Ring.
15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Assign a Department Calling key (46) so extension users can install or remove themselves from
the Department Calling Group. Additional keys can also be assigned for Department Group
features immediate calling destination (58), delayed calling destination (59) and DND
destination (60).
16-01-01
Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Name
Assign a name to the Extension (Department) Groups.
16-01-02
Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Calling Cycle
Set the routing cycle for calls into a department (i.e., when a user dials the department pilot
number). The system can ring the highest priority extension available (Priority Routing, 0) or
cycle in circular order to a new idle extension for each new call (Circular Routing, 1).
16-01-03
Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Routing When Busy
Set how the system routes an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member. The caller
can hear busy tone (0) or overflow to the first available Department Group member (1). This
option is for Intercom calls to an extension, not a pilot number.
16-01-04
Department Group Basic Data Setup - Hunting Mode
Set if an unanswered call should hunt once stopping at the last member tried (0) or continually
hunt through the idle members (1).
2 - 256
Department Calling

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
16-01-05
Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Group All Ring Mode
Operation
Set if all members of the group should ring automatically (1) or through the use of the service
code (0) defined in Program 11-12-09. Selecting automatic will override the settings of Programs
16-01-03 and 16-01-04.
16-01-07
Department Group Basic Data Setup - Call Recall Restriction for STG
Set if a transferred call to the pilot number should recall (0) or camp on (1) to the busy or idle
Department Group.
16-01-08
Department Group Basic Data Setup - Queuing for Department Group Calls
To have Department Group calls queue when busy, set this entry to "1" (0 = No Queuing,
1 = Queuing) for a Department Group. This program allows entries of 1-32, however, the
system accepts any entry other than "0" as to allow queuing (only for ISDN trunks calls).
16-01-09
Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Hunting No Answer Time
Set how long a call will ring a Department Group extension before hunting occurs.
16-01-10
Department Group Basic Data Setup - Hunt Type
Set the type of hunting for each Department Group:
0 = No Queuing
1 = Hunting When Busy
2 = Hunting When Not Answered
3 = Hunting When Busy or No Answer
16-02-01
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Assign extensions to Department Groups and set the priority assignment.
Department Groups: 1~64
16-03-01
Secondary Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Use this program to assign extensions to multiple Department Groups and set the priority
assignment. Each Secondary Department Group can have up to 16 extensions assigned.
Department Groups: 1~64
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-09-07
Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)-Call Queuing
In an extension's Class of Service, turn off (0) or on (1) an extension's ability to have calls
queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy.
20-11-17
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Set/Cancel Department Group Trunk-
to-Trunk Forwarding
In an extension's Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) an extension from using the
immediate automatic transfer of ICM and transferred calls to the Department Groups feature.
Department Calling
2 - 257

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
20-13-06 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)- Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
In an extension's Class of Service, allows a busy extension to manually (0) or automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
20-13-14
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Department Calling
In an extension's Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) extensions from receiving
Department Calls when the pilot number is dialed.
22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
If you want a trunk to be a DIL to a Department Group, assign Service Type 4 for each Night
Service Mode. Refer to PGM 22-07-01.
22-07-01
DIL Assignment
For each trunk assigned Service Type 4 in 22-02-01 above, assign the DIL destination as the
Department Group pilot number (as assigned in Program 11-07-01).
Department: Groups 1~64
24-02-05
System Options for Transfer - Transfer to Busy Department Group Recall Timer
After a trunk is unscreen transferred to a busy Department Group, this timer will start. If the call
is not answered, it will recall the originator. Determine how long the call should ring before
recalling (0~64800 seconds).
24-02-08
System Options for Transfer - Delayed Transfer Timer for All Department Groups
Determine how long a call should ring a Department Group before transferring the call (0~64800
seconds).
24-05-01
Department Group Transfer Target Setup
Assign the Speed Dial bin to each Department Group to hold the destination for the immediate
automatic transfer of ICM and transferred calls to the Department Group feature.
Operation
To call a department group:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial department's extension number.

The system routes the call to the first free telephone in the department group.
3.
Optional: To manually ring all members of the group, dial the single digit service code assigned for
All Member Ring (Program 11-16-10).
2 - 258
Department Calling

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
To log out of your Department Calling Group:
While you are logged out, Department Calling cannot route calls to your extension.
1.
Press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial 650 + 1.
- OR -
Press Department Calling Log In key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: 46).

The key lights while you are logged out.
To log back in to your Department Calling Group:
While you log back in, Department Calling will route calls to your extension.
1.
Press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial 650 + 0.
- OR -
Press Department Calling Log In key (PGM 15-07-01 or SC 751: 46).

The key goes out when you log back in.
Department Calling
2 - 259

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 260
Department Calling

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Department Step Calling
Description
After calling a busy Department Calling Group member, an extension user can have Department Step
Calling quickly call another member in the group. The caller does not have to hang up and place another
Intercom call if the first extension called is unavailable. Department Step Calling also allows an
extension user to cycle through the members of a Department Group.
Conditions
If required, use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service
Code (default code = 2).
A function key for Department Step Calling can be assigned (code 36).
In PGM 20-08-12, will enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use Department
Step Calling.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Department Step Calling
2 - 261

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Programming
11-12-07
Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Step Call
If required, customize the Step Call service code to be used by an extension user (default: 708).
11-16-01
Single Digit Service Code Setup
If required, use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code
(default: 2).
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key Department Step Calling (code 36).
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-08-12
Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Department Step Calling
In an extension Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use
Department Step Calling.
Related Features
Department Calling
Programmable Function Keys
Operation
To make a Step Call:
1.
Place a call to a busy Department Group member.
- OR -
Place a call to a Department Group pilot number.
2.
Dial Department Step Code (2) to call the next available Department Group member.
3.
Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members.

You step through Department Groups set in Program 16-02-01.
2 - 262
Department Step Calling

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Dialing Number Preview
Description
Dialing Number Preview lets a display multiline terminal user dial and review a number before the
system dials it. Dialing Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors.
Conditions
An extension user cannot edit the displayed number.
In order to place an outgoing call, an extension user must have outgoing access to a line,
CAP or trunk group key.
If the system has VRS installed, you must first press in order to preview a number.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Display Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Dialing Number Preview
2 - 263

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1~15) to an extension.
20-08-05
Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Dial Number Preview
In an extension Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension's ability to use Dial
Number Preview.
Operation
To use Dial Number Preview to place a call (multiline terminal only):
1.
Do not lift the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
To preview any number, dial the number you wish to call.

With VRS installed, you must first press , to preview the number.
To preview a Speed Dial System/Group number, press the Redial key and dial the
Speed Dial System/Group bin number you want to call.

The number displays.
3.
To dial out the displayed trunk number, press a Line/CAP/Trunk Group key.

If the previewed number as a trunk access code (e.g., 9), you can press Speaker key instead.
- OR -
To dial an Intercom number, press the Speaker key.
- OR -
To cancel the number without dialing it out, press Hold.
2 - 264
Dialing Number Preview

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Description
For an extension with Dial Pad Confirmation Tone enabled, the user hears a beep each time they press
a key. This is helpful for Intercom calls and Dial Pulse trunk calls, since these calls provide no Call
Progress tones.
Conditions
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone does not apply to single line telephones or DECT Wireless
Terminals.
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is not canceled when dialing in handset mode.
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is canceled when dialing in handsfree mode, but only for
internal calls. The tone will still be heard when dialing externally.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
2 - 265

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Programming
11-11-19
Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Key Touch Tone On/Off
If required, change the service code enabling or disabling the Key Touch Tone (default: 724).
Operation
To enable/disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone:
1.
Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key.
2.
Dial 724.
2 - 266
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Dial Tone Detection
Description
If a trunk has Dial Tone Detection enabled, the system monitors for dial tone from the Telco or PBX
when a user places a call on that trunk. If the user accesses the trunk directly (by pressing a line key or
dialing #9 and the trunk's number), the system will drop the trunk if dial tone does not occur. If the user
access the trunk via a Trunk Group (by dialing a trunk group code or automatically through a feature like
Last Number Redial), the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group.
Refer to the chart under Programming for more information.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled for manually dialed calls; enabled for automatically dialed calls.
System Availability
Terminals
All Stations
Required Component(s)
None
Dial Tone Detection
2 - 267

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Abbreviated Dialing
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys (Outbound)
Central Office Calls, Placing
Last Number Redial
Save Number Dialed
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Tie Lines
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Groups
Programming
Table 2-9 Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction
Result if dial tone
Method
14-02-05
14-02-11
not present . . .
Press a line key
0
0
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
- or -
Dial #9+ Trunk
0
1
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
number
1
0
Trunk drops
1
1
Trunk drops
Dial a Trunk
0
0
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
Group code
- or -
0
1
Trunk reroutes after time-out
Automatically
through a feature
1
0
Trunk drops
1
1
Trunk reroutes after time-out
2 - 268
Dial Tone Detection

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
10-09-01
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
If dial tone detection is enabled, be sure to allocate at least one circuit for dial tone detection
[ICM/Trunk (0) or Trunk (2)].
14-02-05
Analog Trunk Data Setup - Dial Tone Detection for Directly Accessed Trunks
Enable(1) or disable (0) dial tone detection for manually dialed trunk calls. This option only
pertains to calls placed using line keys or Direct Trunk Access.
14-02-11
Analog Trunk Data Setup - Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone
If enabled, the system will skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option pertains to
calls placed using Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, Speed Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or Save
Number Dialed. It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls.
21-01-05
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Dial Tone Detection Timer
If dial tone detection is enabled, the system will wait this interval for the Telco to return dial tone.
When this interval expires, the system assumes dial tone is not present. To disable this timer
(and have the system wait continuously), enter 0.
21-01-06
System Options for Outgoing Calls - Dial Pause at First Digit
If Dial Tone Detection is disabled, the system will wait based on this timer before sending dialed
digits. If using Dial Tone Detection, this timer should be set longer than the timer set in 21-01-
05, otherwise, if this timer is set shorter than 21-01-05, then Dial Tone Detection is satisfied and
21-01-05 is disregarded (not used).
Operation
Dial Tone Detection is automatic if enabled in programming.
Dial Tone Detection
2 - 269

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 270
Dial Tone Detection

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Digital Voice Mail
Description
The system is fully compatible with NEC's digital voice mail systems. These systems provide telephone
users with comprehensive Voice Mail and Automated Attendant features. Voice Mail ends the frustration
and cost of missed calls, inaccurate written messages and telephone tag. This frees a company's busy
receptionists and secretaries for more productive work.
Automated Attendant automatically answers the system's incoming calls. After listening to a customized
message, an outside caller can dial a system extension or use Voice Mail.
Integrated Voice Mail enhances the telephone system with the following features:
J
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail
An extension user can forward their calls to Voice Mail. Once forwarded, calls to the extension
connect to that extension's mailbox. The caller can leave a message in the mailbox instead of
calling back later. Forwarding can occur for all calls immediately, for unanswered calls or only
when the extension is busy. When a user transfers a call to an extension forwarded to Voice Mail,
the call waits for the Delayed Call Forwarding time before routing to the called extension's mailbox.
This gives the transferring party the option of retrieving the call instead of having it go directly to the
mailbox.
J
Leaving a Message
Voice Mail lets a multiline terminal extension user easily leave a message at an extension that is
unanswered, busy or in Do Not Disturb. The caller just presses their Voice Mail key to leave a
message in the called extension's mailbox. There is no need to call back later.
J
Transferring to Voice Mail
By using Transfer to Voice Mail, a multiline terminal extension user can Transfer a call to the user's
own or a co-worker's mailbox. After the Transfer goes through, the caller can leave a message in
the mailbox.
J
Live Record
While on a call, an extension user can have Voice Mail record the conversation. The multiline
terminal user just presses the Voice Mail Record key; the single line telephone user dials a code.
Once recorded, the Voice Messaging System stores the conversation as a new message in the
user's mailbox. After calling their mailbox, a user can save, edit or delete the recorded
conversation.
J
Live Monitor
A multiline terminal user can have their idle extension emulate a personal answering machine. This
lets Voice Mail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the
extension's incoming calls route to the user's subscriber mailbox. Once the mailbox answers, the
Digital Voice Mail
2 - 271

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
user hears the caller's incoming message. The multiline terminal user can then:
N
Let the call go through to their mailbox
N
Intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox
J
Voice Mail Overflow
If Voice Mail automatically answers trunks, Voice Mail Overflow can reroute those trunks to other
extensions when all Voice Mail ports do not answer or, with certain software, are busy. During
periods of high traffic, this prevents the outside calls from ringing Voice Mail for an inordinate
amount of time. There are two types of Voice Mail Overflow: Immediate and Delayed. With
immediate overflow, calls immediately reroute to other extensions when all Voice Mail ports do not
answer or, with certain software, are busy. With delayed overflow, calls reroute after a preset
interval. Without any type of overflow, the outside calls ring Voice Mail until a port becomes
available or the outside caller hangs up.
J
Voice Mail Caller ID
The Voice Mail can use ANI/DNIS information to identify the outside caller that left a message in a
user's mailbox. When the message recipient dials 0 or presses the CID softkey while listening to a
message, they hear the outside telephone number of the message sender.
The message recipient can also return the from their mailbox if allowed by system programming by
pressing the CALL softkey or #,0. Refer to Caller ID Call Return on page 2-159.
Voice Mail Queuing
When accessing the voice mail, the system provides a voice mail queue. If all the voice mail ports are
busy, any calls trying to get to the voice mail will be placed in queue. As the voice mail ports become
available, the calls will be connected to the voice mail in the order in which they were received.
As the Voice Mail Queue follows Department Hunting programming, the queue can hold a maximum of
10 calls. If the queue is full or if the voice mail ports are not assigned to a Department Group, the calls
will be handled as though there were no voice mail queuing feature enabled. The calls will either access
voice mail if a port is available or they will receive a busy signal.
The Voice Mail Queuing feature does not work with the Conversation Record feature.
Message Key will Operate as Voice Mail Key
The system enhances a telephone's Message key function when connected to a system which has voice
mail installed. When an extension receives a voice mail, the Message key can be used to check the
number of messages in voice mail, as well as call the voice mail to listen to the messages. If there is no
Voice Mail Programmable Function Key defined (Program 15-07-01, code 77), the telephone's Message
Waiting LED will flash to indicate new messages.
This option is not available with a networked voice mail - the voice mail must be local.
2 - 272
Digital Voice Mail

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing allows an Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few
letters in the extension user's name. With Directory Dialing, the caller does not have to remember the
extension number of the person they wish to reach -- just their name. Here's how Directory Dialing
works:
1.
When the Automated Attendant answers, it sends the call to a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
(Optionally, the caller may be asked to dial a digit to access Directory Dialing.)
2.
The Directory Dialing Mailbox plays the Directory Dialing Message which asks the caller to dial
letters for the name of the person they wish to reach.
3.
The caller dials the first three letters for the person's name. They can dial by first name or last
name, depending on how the Directory Dialing Message was recorded and the Directory Dialing
Mailbox was set up.
4.
Voice Mail searches the list of programmed extension names for a match of the caller-entered
letters.
5.
The caller dials the digit for the extension they wish to reach, and Voice Mail sends the call to that
extension. The call is sent as a Screened or Unscreened transfer, depending on programming.
For callers to use Directory Dialing, the system must have a name programmed for each extension.
Each extension should also have a name recorded in their Subscriber Mailbox. In addition, each
extension used by Directory Dialing must be installed.
Conditions
The periodic reminder message requires a DSP daughter board for Voice Response
System (VRS).
Ring Group calls do not follow extension call forwarding to voice mail.
Analog ports on the CPU do not support Message Waiting lamping.
Conversation Record will not work for monitored calls.
Caller ID information will be passed from the voice mail to an extension for pre-answer
display on an unscreened transfer from voice mail.
Off-premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines.
To have the Voice Mail Automated Attendant answer a trunk, program the trunk as a DIL to
a Voice Mail port.
When the voice mail places a call on hold, it uses Group Hold. Any line appearances for the
trunk will show the hold flash rate, however, users will not be able to pick up these calls (a
busy signal will be heard).
Digital Voice Mail
2 - 273

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
VMP(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
CTI LX Lite(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
CTI LX(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) ETU
Related Features
Barge-In
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Caller ID
Caller ID Caller Return
Central Office Calls, Placing
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Hold
Message Waiting
One-Touch Calling
Programmable Function Keys
2 - 274
Digital Voice Mail

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
Transfer
Programming
10-09-01
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Assign at least one circuit for DTMF reception (type 0 or 1).
Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers:
H
In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.
H
In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.
11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers
Assign a Department Group pilot number for the Voice Mail (8 digits maximum). The extensions
are assigned to the group in Program 16-02-01.
15-02-08
Message Waiting LED Color
This option allows you to select whether the Message Wait LED located at the top of the
multiline terminal will flash green (0) or red (1) when a Message Wait indication is flashing. By
default, this option is set to "1" (red).
15-02-26
Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup, MSG Key Operation Mode
Determine whether an extension's MSG key should function as a Message key (0) or Voice Mail
key (1) (Default = 0). If set as a Message key, the user will be able to press the key to call the
voice mail only when they have new messages. If set as a Voice Mail key, it will function as a
normal Voice Mail key (it will not be active if Centralized Voice Mail is used).
15-03-01
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - SLT Signaling Type
For each Electra Elite IPK II voice mail extension, this option must be set to "0".
15-03-03
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Terminal Type
Set all SLIU ports used for Voice Mail as type 1.
15-03-09
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Caller ID Function for External Module
This option must be set to `0' when voice mail is used or the integration code for the disconnect
function will be incorrect.
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a Voice Mail key to an extension. You must enter the Voice Mail key code (code 77)
followed by:
H
Your own extension number if you are setting up your own Voice Mail key.
H
A virtual extension number if you are setting up a Message Center key for a virtual extension.
H
A co-worker's extension number if you are setting up a Message Center key for an installed
extension.
H
An uninstalled extension's number if you are setting up a Message Center key for an uninstalled
extension.
Digital Voice Mail
2 - 275

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
(Optional) Assign a Voice Mail Record key to an extension (code 78).
(Optional) Assign a Personal Answering Machine Emulation key (code 91).
(Optional) Use a Call Redirect key (49) to allow a user to transfer a call to another extension or
voice mail without answering the call.
16-01-08
Department Group Basic Data Setup - Queuing for Department Group Call
To have Department Group calls queue when busy, set this entry to "1" for an extension or voice
mail group. For no queuing, enter "0".
16-02-01
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Put all the Voice Mail extensions in a unique Department Group (do not use Department Group
1). No other extensions should be in this group. This allows DILs to Voice Mail to ring other
Voice Mail extensions when the DIL's assigned port is busy. Only one Voice Mail group is
allowed per system. Be sure to set up the Department Group in order. (For example, the first
extension should be order 1, the second order 2, etc.)
20-02-09
System Options for Multi-Line Telephones - Disconnect Supervision
Enable (1) disconnect supervision for the system.
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15) to the voice mail extensions. It is recommended to use COS 14
for all time modes.
20-09-02
Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Caller ID Display
It is recommended that these options be set to on (1) for the voice mail COS.
20-11-01
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forward Immediate
20-11-02
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forward When Busy
20-11-03
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding When Unanswered
20-11-04
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding (Both Ringing)
20-11-05
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding with Follow Me
20-11-12
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding Off-Premise
It is recommended that these options be set to off (0) for the voice mail COS.
20-13-01
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Long Conversation Alarm
20-13-05
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Intercom off-hook Signaling
20-13-06
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Automatic off-hook Signaling
20-13-07
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Message Waiting
20-13-15
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In, Initiate
20-13-16
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In, Receive
20-13-28
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Allow Class of Service to be Changed
20-13-35
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Block Camp On
It is recommended that these options be set to off (0) for the voice mail COS.
20-13-13
Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Continued Dialing
Enable Continued Dialing (1) for all extensions that will dial Voice Mail features.
2 - 276
Digital Voice Mail

Electra Elite IPK II
Document Revision 1
22-01-04
System Options for Incoming Calls - DIL No Answer Recall Time
If setting up Delayed Voice Mail Overflow, enter a timer value greater than 0. Overflow will occur
after this interval (provided the other related programming is correct). If setting up Immediate
Voice Mail Overflow, enter 0.
24-02-02
System Options for Transfer - MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls
Use this option to enable (0) or disable (1) MOH on Transfer. If enabled (0), a transferred caller
hears Music on Hold while their call rings the destination extension. If disabled (1), a transferred
caller hears ringback while their call rings the destination extension. For this option to work with
voice mail, the transferred call must be an unscreened transfer.
Assign Trunks As Automated Attendant Trunks - Method 1
22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to ring into Voice Mail as a Direct Inward Line
(DIL).
22-07-01
DIL Assignment
Assign the master/pilot number of the voice mail group from Program 11-07-01 as the DIL
destination. If all Voice Mail ports are in the same unique Extension (Department) Group (see
Program 16-02 above), the DIL will ring another Voice Mail port if its assigned port is busy.
Assign Trunks As Automated Attendant Trunks - Method 2
22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign Service Type 0 to each trunk you want to ring into Voice Mail as a normal line.
22-04-01
Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign Ring Group 102 for an In-Skin/External Voice Mail, or 103 for a Central Voice Mail as the
destination.
For Either Method:
22-04-01
Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
To enable Voice Mail Overflow, assign selected extensions to a Ring Group that will ring for
unanswered DILs to Voice Mail ports. In Program 22-06, enter 1 to enable overflow ringing.
22-08-01
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
For Voice Mail Overflow, enter the Ring Group that unanswered DILs to Voice Mail will ring after
the DIL Call Waiting time (Program 22-01-04).
24-02-03
System Options for Transfer - Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Set the interval a transferred call waits at a forwarded extension before routing to the called
extension's mailbox.
Digital Voice Mail
2 - 277

Document Revision 1
Electra Elite IPK II
45-01-01
Voice Mail Integration Options, Voice Mail Department Group Number
Assign which Extension (Department) Group number is to be assigned as the voice mail group.
This program defines the Quick Transfer to Voice Mail destination. An entry of `0' means there
is no voice mail installed.
Department Groups: 0, 1~64
45-01-02
Voice Mail Integration Options, Voice Mail Master Name
Enter the Voice Mail master name up to 12 characters.
45-01-06
Voice Mail Integration Options, Record Alert Tone Interval Time
This timer sets the interval (0~64800 seconds) between Voice Mail Conversation Record alerts.
80-03-01
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
80-04-01
Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
Use these programs to set the criteria for DTMF dial, ringback and busy tones.
Operation
Calling Your Mailbox
To call your mailbox:
With a multiline terminal, our Voice Mail key and your Message Center keys flash red when they have
messages waiting. If you do not have a Voice Mail key, your MW LED flashes instead.
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press your Voice Mail key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 77).
- OR -
Press VM Msg softkey.
- OR -
Press the Speaker key and dial the Voice Mail Master Number. After Voice Mail Answers, dial
your mailbox number.

Your mailbox number is normally the same as your extension number. You may optionally dial a co-worker's
mailbox - or use this procedure to call your mailbox from a co-worker's telephone.
- OR -
Press the Speaker key and dial 8.
2.
To return a displayed Message Waiting, press the Speaker key or lift the handset.
To listen to the voice messages, with "Voice Message" displayed, press the Speaker key or lift the
handset.

The voice mail is called.

The voice mail is only called if there are new messages. If the display indicates "Check Messages No Messages",
then press the EXIT key to return the telephone to an idle condition.
2 - 278
Digital Voice Mail